Home

R&S FSV-K84/-K85 Firmware Option 1xEV

1. 319 Ref Level rnissu aidr Ref Level remote control Res BW Auto nineteenth eines Res BW Manual lt siisiinsrisiariiinniiisssiorreieiesiniiaeiis RF Atten Auto e RF Atten Auto remote control RF Atten Manual eese RF Atten Manual remote control Save remote control sss Soale M Single Meas remote control Single Sweep sss Single Sweep remote control 324 Sweep Sweep Count remote control 294 Sweep lit cro ei it slave Asia eet Sweep Time remote control Sweeptime Auto sess Sweeptime Manual n se eenen Sweeptime Manual remote control Sweep Type sse Trace Mode remote control sss 250 Trg Gate Source remote control 320 322 Trigger Offset 71 89 109 Tiger QUE iere a tete 167 Video BW AUTO enne nne 158 Video BW Manual sis 157 M iaai 110 175 Y Axis Maximum eesseseseeeeeneenene 105 Y AXIS Minimum 105 Softkeys Lower Level Hysteresis 112 Upper Level Hysteresis 112 Sort Channel Table Span menu Special characters c scccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeenneeeesees 197 Spectrum Emission M
2. CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the relative limit of the upper lower adjacent channel for adjacent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit value defined with the CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute command This mechanism allows automatic check ing of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix n lt k gt Parameters lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt Example Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 Selects the measurement window irrelevant O to 100dB the value for the lower limit must be lower than the value for the upper limit RST 0 dB CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power 219 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper lower adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is
3. ChannelType MAC Walsh Ch SF 2 64 Sym Rate ksps 19 2 ksps automatically calculated Modulation BPSK I Power dB 0 dB automatically calculated State Off DomainConflict No automatically calculated To change the channel type use the dropdown menu that opens when selecting high lighting the Channel Type field that should be changed modulation settings are changed in the same way To change the channel number type another channel number in the form ChannelNum ber SpreadingFactor or just the code number in the respective field Confirm the change with the ENTER key To activate or deactivate a channel select the State field and confirm with the ENTER key The R amp S FSV automatically checks for conflicts between two active channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 239 Delete Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel without further notice Meas New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Initiates a measurement in Auto Search mode see Channel Search Mode on page 73 The measurement results are applied to the active channel table The active channel table is overwritten without further notice The softkey is only available if you have selected the Auto Search mode in the Channel Table Settings dialog box Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 76 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis
4. sss 49 K84 K85 Peak Code Domain Error K84 85 remote 312 Peak Code Domain Error K84 Peak Code Domain Error K85 60 Power vs Chip K84 85 remote 306 307 Power vs Chip K84 sssssssssssssessssesrrrsrrissrrrnrrrrnsns 39 Power vs Chip K85 s sss 51 Power vs Symbol K84 85 remote 307 Power vs Symbol K84 Power vs Symbol K85 Symbol Constellation K84 85 remote 313 Symbol Constellation K84 Symbol Constellation K85 Result Settings K84 aiitem de rib iem 77 EE 97 Result Summary remote command sssssssesssesssreserressrsessreresssnrrenns 201 Revision 0 A K84 remote Commande 247 RF Slot K84 remote command susss 247 RF Preamplifier B22 69 87 105 154 RF Slot F ll Idle trot enne 145 RMS KEE 158 174 RMS detector D H 173 Roll off factor d X 80 aE 92 RRC Filter KBM M M 80 KGS 92 RX Settings Cj ER 115 S Sample detector A 173 sample number sese 140 Sample rate Digital UO Interface remote control 318 piles 113 Save Channel Table eege IE 77 97 ES cr gt
5. ssssssssssssssesessse esee nennen eintreten nns essent nnns enn 155 RINT TT 155 ENT DEE 156 EE 156 Iriput CA CNG EE 156 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 151 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a Se T SS a es es ee Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 252 Range Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis This softkey and its submenu are available for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements Range Log 100 dB Range Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Range Log 50 dB Range Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISP WIND T
6. 200 Unit dBm Yes InclusiveFlag true Yes StopPower Value lt power in dBm gt The stop power must be equal Yes to the start power of the next power class The StopPower value of the last range is 200 Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Yes DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute Relative Yes Absolute and Rela tive Absolute or Relative Table 6 14 Attributes and child nodes of the Range element normal ranges Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand Index 0 19 Inde XE s are continuous Yes and have to start with 0 Name lt string gt Name of the range Only if Referen ceChannel con tains a name and the range is the reference range Short lt string gt Short name of the range No Name ChannelType TX Adjacent Yes T Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 183 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Information Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand WeightingFilter Only if Referen cePower method is TX Channel Power and the range is the refer ence range Type RRC CFilter Type of the weighting filter Yes Roll Off Factor 0 1 Excess bandwidth of the fil Only if the filter ter type is RRC Bandwidth lt bandwidth in Hz gt Filter bandwidth Only if the filter type is RRC FrequencyRange Yes Start lt frequency in Hz gt
7. 0 Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well 0 Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or several times Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following For details see the chapter SCPI Command Structure in the base unit description Boolean This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 nae pu cp Ec A c c p FP ae Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 197 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 2 4 1 7 2 4 2
8. PH 101 Display configuration remote Commande 199 display range IS WE 141 142 152 153 Display range RU le 68 86 103 147 E Electronic input attenuation SE 318 Enhanced Algorithm cL E 79 GP 92 EVM vs Symbol G4 RS EEE PEE APE A E E E M K85 EX IQ BOX DiglConf export Tomat external noise source F FFT Filter Mode PE 160 165 ape M 160 165 SOKOV hee eerte acere aote petiit 160 165 Filters Bu r M 176 Selecting Ge KT 176 filter types KBA 80 EE 92 Filter types E WE 176 EMI 60B E 176 Normal E ICH EE 176 RRC a 176 Frame synchronization cccccccseeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 90 frequency DEI 68 86 103 149 SIAM necessa d rhe 149 TE 149 Frequency VE 68 86 103 147 Frequency En E 147 K84 Frontend settings A 68 85 Full Scale Level Digital Baseband IQ remote control 316 Digital UO Interface remote control 317 ek ICH Te icc ettet tiet etin pedes 114 G General Results K84 iet te aen tad edet 36 303 305 KBO P PR 49 H Hysteresis Lower Auto level sseseem 112 Upper Auto level een 112 l IEC IEEE bus Command description sees 195 Inactive Channel Threshold GL K84 remote command I
9. sss 109 6 2 8 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu for CDA Measurements sese 111 6 2 9 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements neern 112 6 2 1 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer menu in BTS mode The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the main menu of the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option ED You can also access the main menu via the MEAS CONFIG hardkey SLINGS OVERVIEW E 67 Frontend SOUS TE 68 Ie E 68 EE 68 B gt wc 68 L 157 1 MM 69 Gi EE 69 ee qo EET S 69 eges T Ecc e m 69 jas EE 70 L Capture Lengi BEBE ER NES 70 Eo 6 1 NRRNERRRP A A 70 Ec quc NERONI TERES 70 L Trigger Source Free Run 70 L Trigger Source Extemal esses tenerent tnnt ntnatntartr sts a sns tias 70 L Trigger Palais noscere eres iain tere xad e nad 71 L Trigger Offset E 71 Select Channel Stings ee NNENREEEEENEERENEENEENEREEEEREEREEREEEENENERREEEENEEEEEEENEEKENEEEENE NEE 71 L Channel S NE m 72 L Mapping Typus kannte tta afia dle ttai datae 72 GE 72 Channel Table Seung TEE 73 L Channel Search Mode 73 L Inactive Channel Threshbold nnns 74 x 0 N menm 74 L NewiCopwEdn entente tente terat itte tnt etn 74 Fd CREER c ubi motif futt ap tI LU 76 L Delta Channel iusserit ce n acer cds 76 do mH 76 aos MCI ern eee 77 EE 77 ms EE 77 2 sS mm 77 e EE 77 L Restore Default WM E 77 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 66 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Inst
10. reserved 6 Table 7 3 Return values for parameter CTABle Value Description Range Unit max time offset Max timing offset value of all channels S code number for max The code number which has max timing offset value time code class for max The code class which has max timing offset value time max phase offset Max phase offset value of all channels rad code number for max phase The code number which has max phase offset value code class for max The code class which has max phase offset value phase reserved reserved for future functionality 0 7 9 16 Channel Bitstream The command returns the bitstream of one slot i e it returns one value for each bit either 0 or 1 in a symbol bit 1 gt bit 2 gt bit n gt The number of returned bits depends on the modulation type For BPSK modulated sig nals there is one bit per symbol for 2BPSK and QPSK signals there are 2 bits per symbol for 8 PSK modulated signals there are 3 bits per symbol and for 16QAM modulated signal there are 4 bits per symbol Accordingly the bitstream per slot is of different lengths The number of results is between 2 and 400 If a channel is detected as being inactive the invalid bits in the bit stream are identified by 9 na P D A Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 311
11. Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Select Channel Half Slot Branch Common Settings Select Channel Select Half Slot Select Branch Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 263 SENSe CDPower CODE on page 257 6 2 3 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for CDA measurements For other measurements see the description of the Frequency menu for the base unit E LE 103 GP E 103 FREQUGINCY OSCE c M 103 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 E fcenter E fmax SPAN in 2 span 0 0 Hz lt fcenter s fmax fmax and span i are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 282 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize This softkey is available for code domain and power vs time measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 282 Frequency Offse
12. Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 322 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Trace menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for Code Domain Analysis measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Clear WME RM 109 Max Fold RE 110 lte d Tele BEEN 110 Dir EE 110 VOW EE 110 Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 109 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis El Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 Min Hold The minimum value is deter
13. Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position of the marker so does the delta marker Suffix n Selects the measurement window m 1 irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT LINK ON CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 213 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis aa a CALCulate Subsystem lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum The cor resp
14. 08 92 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis eS SS eS Se a M l w Mt Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 244 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 243 Cut Off Frequency Synch Multicarrier Settings Defines the cut off frequency of the RRC filter The cutoff frequency is the frequency at which the passband of the filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 244 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 243 Channel Table Settings Opens the Channel Table Settings dialog box and the corresponding submenu Predefined Channel Table Settings Channel Search Mode Predefined Auto Search Inactive Channel Threshold 49 9 dB Channel Tables DO16QAM DOSPSK DO IDLE DOQPSK 1xEV DBO standard table Predefined channel tables are a way to customize measurements The RECENT channel table contains the last configuration used before switching from Auto Search to Prede fined The DOQPSK DO8PSK DO16QAM and DO IDLE channel tables are included in the option per default and are configured according to
15. ON OFF RST OFF CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on the ACLR limit check CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one specific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 223 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 2 4 3 CALCulate Subsystem To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt limit line Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem The CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem defines the limit check for the Spec trum Emission Mask CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIMits ccccceeccceceseceeeeeceeneeecaseceeeseecaneeeeeseeeaeees 224 CAL Culate lt n gt LIMitek gt ESPecthum MODE innnan a aaa aa aai 225 CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class EXCLusive usus 225 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUN cccsccccecce
16. R amp S FSV K84 K85 Meas Start Stop remote control 325 Meas Time Auto esse Meas Time Manual D Min remote control ccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees Next Min remote control sessessees Next Peak remote control Noise Correction ssssseeene Noise SOUNCE ner orent einen Noise Src On Off remote control No of HalfSlots entrent OBW remote control sess Occupied Bandwidth EN Peak remote control sss Ph Noise Ref Fixed remote control 212 Ph Noise On Off remote control E xoa Power Meder neret retener ere Power Mode remote control s Power VS Time 1 onere nente rnnt R amp S SUPPOMN ir trt e re Range Range Lin Unit cree tne Range Lin Unit remote control Range Linear 96 Range Linear 96 remote control Range Log remote control Range Log 100 dB Range Log 10 dB esses Range Log 1 dB ene Range Log 50 GB ss Range Log 5 dB ire Range Log Manual RBW VBW Manual RBW VBW Noise 10 esee RBW VBW Pulse 1 RBW VBW Sine 1 3 Recall remote control sssssssssss 270 Reference Manual sese Re
17. R amp S FSV K84 K85 Contents 1 1 1 2 1 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 7 1 7 2 7 3 Contents LN E 5 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeee nennen nennen nnne nnn nnne nennen nnne nnn nnn nennen 5 Conventions Used in the Documentation eeeeeenneeneen 7 How to Use the Help System eeeeeeeeeeeeenee enne nnne nnn nnne nnns 8 rigor ricis cU 10 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 11 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eeneeeennnnn nnn 11 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask eeeeeeeeenn 12 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error 13 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 15 Measuring the Composite EVM eene nennen nnn nnns 16 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error eene 18 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 20 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eeeeeeeneennm nnnm 20 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask eeeeeeeeennn 21 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error 22 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 23
18. SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel ADJ The modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC 33kHz Sets the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel to 33 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 1 to 66 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 2 to 99 kHz and so on SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX channel ALT1 ALT2 A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing causes a change by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 Example POW ACH SPAC ALT1 100 kHz Sets the spacing between TX channel and alternate adjacent channel 1 ALT1 from 40 kHz to 100 kHz In consequence the spacing between the TX channel and all higher alternate adjacent channels is increased b
19. Start value of the range Yes Stop lt frequency in Hz gt Stop value of the range Yes Limit dBm Hz dBm dBc A Range must contain Yes dBr dB exactly two limit nodes one of the limit nodes has to have a relative unit e g dBc the other one must have an absolute unit e g dBm Start Value lt numeric_value gt Power limit at start frequency Yes Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc Sets the unit of the start dBr dB value Stop Value lt numeric_value gt Power limit at stop frequency Unit dBm Hz dBm dBc Sets the unit of the stop value dBr dB LimitFailMode Absolute Relative If used it has to be identical No Absolute and Rela to DefaultLimitFailMode tive Absolute or Relative RBW Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz RBW on page 131 Yes Type NORM PULS No CFIL RRC VBW Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz gt VBW on page 131 Yes Detector NEG POS SAMP If used it has to be identical No RMS AVER in all ranges QUAS Sweep Mode Manual Auto Sweep Time Mode Yes on page 131 Time time in sec Sweep Time on page 131 No Amplitude No ReferenceLevel Value power in dBm gt Ref Level on page 131 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used npe ue P c EC c c p HR Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 184 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Inform
20. active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the 20 dB preamplifier on and off With option R amp S FSV B22 the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz With option R amp S FSV B24 the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range This command is not available when using R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 319 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis EENEG 7 10 2 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INP GAIN STAT ON Turns the preamplifier on INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 50 O Example INP IMP 75 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements Parameters lt Source gt RF DIQ RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ only available with R amp
21. sese rennen 288 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet eerte trente nnne erint ttn nne aka ne EA aa nen Rape PR E eade aun 289 IEN Ge POMWer ACHannel PDRE Ger EVel ener neret nns ee neret rsen 289 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE cece sse enne rennen nennen renes 290 IGENGe POWerACHannelHRtterence TSCHannel AUTO 290 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TvCHannel MANual esses eene 290 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing AL Termate channelz nennen 291 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel lt channel gt IGENGe POWer ACHannel GbACTnol ACHannell sese nnne nnne nnne SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNtLt sees nnne neren reete neret rennen IEN Ge TPCOWer BANDwid l Gul ISENS POWT HSPE e SENSe POWetNCONRT6CGLOR 2 crure ep cte ui ur uet pea Eon dye dadadada cu aAA aei ed ga eda SENGER EE eege EE E eege EISE Ee Kee lt EEN EISE EEN RE SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGI e c Dicto s eee adde dd sab edd deere SENSe SWEep EGATe PObLarily rrr rentre veansaceneapoaieavusteasereenseqbnedeensndeancundenee EISE ENN SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERIod cece ceeeeeeecceneeseaeeenaeeseaeeseaeessaeeseaeessaeessseeseeesseeeeenees SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt G Oberangez eene entree enne nnne IGENZGe GwWEenEGATe RACeckCGOMMent enne rnnnnreeneren rnit nns en reset rennes IGENZGe GwWEepnEGhTe RACeckGTAbtorangez eene een nennen nn
22. 2 iore etie erster e eria L anon e Ia a Lands e cvs Lean n ea ad aane 301 TRACGe DATA Results tei ttc there eoa xk eaa RR Ra Rep ae EUR Den ra ELE FERA KA Rud 301 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual eene 314 Programming Examples eese eene nennen nennen niente nine nnne 327 Status Reporting System of the 1xEV DO Analysis 330 List of COMMING TE 331 j deem 337 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 4 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Preface Documentation Overview 1 Preface 1 1 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSV is divided as follows e Quick Start Guide e Operating Manuals for base unit and options e Service Manual e Online Help e Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and basic measurements are described Also a brief introduction to remote control is given The manual includes general information e g Safety Instruc tions and the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction General information Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel Chapter 3 Preparing for Use Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options Chapter 5 Basic Operations C
23. Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the specified TX chan nel Suffix channel 1 11 the TX channel Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 286 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis a SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Alpha gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN3 0 35 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the TX channel 3 to 0 35 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel State This command activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT ACH ON SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt channel gt State This command activates the weighting filter for the specified alternate channel Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT ALT3 ON Activates the weighting filter for alternate channel 3 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe C HANnel lt channel gt State This command activates the weighting filter for the specified TX channel Suffix lt channel gt 1 18 the TX channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT CHA3 ON Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 3 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 287 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SEN
24. Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Range Log 50 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe on page 250 Range Log 10 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 141 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Range Log 5 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Range Log 1 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt
25. E 282 SENSe FREQuency CENTer S TEPAU TO i enero eaae a aai aaa 282 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK eene nehmen enne anaa 282 SENSe JFREQueney CENT er STEP LINK FAG TO 2 toto ona deed EENEG 283 SENS amp IFREQuency OFF Set eiiean na eee eae ea ee lad 283 SENSE IF ee EE 283 PENSe FRE QUEN PANIF IB 283 SENS amp J FREDQ snCy S TAR iiini data AEEA edie ees 283 SENSE I FRE QUEN LE 284 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 281 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis b a l M SENSe Subsystem SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency frequency domain or measuring frequency time domain Parameters lt Frequency gt Range 0 to fmax RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt Range 1 to fmax RST 0 1 x lt span value gt Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT STEP 120 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples the step size of the center frequency to the span ON or sets the value of the center frequency entered via SENSe FREQuency CENTer OFF Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of th
26. In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the code domain power of the signal Compared to the measurement without an external trigger see previous example the repetition rate of the measurement increases In screen B the result summary is displayed In the row Trigger to Frame the offset between the trigger event and and the start of the slot is shown Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 24 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 4 4 1 4 5 Measuring the Composite EVM Adjusting the Trigger Offset The delay between the trigger event and the start of the slot can be compensated for by adjusting the trigger offset e Set an external trigger source and the trigger offset Open the IQ Capture dialog box Setthe Trigger Source option to External Setthe Trigger Offset to 100us to compensate analog delays of the trigger event In the two screens the following results are displayed Screen A shows the the same as above In screen B the result summary is displayed In the Trigger to Frame result the offset between the trigger event and the start of the slot has been adjusted Measuring the Composite EVM The Error Vector Magnitude EVM describes the quality of the measured signal com pared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vector represents the ratio of the measured signal to the
27. PICH 1 2 RRI 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE 2104 0 15 0 I branch 1 Q branch 0 65535 decimal The decimal number interpreted as a binary number in 16 bits determines the half slot in which the channel is active value 1 or inactive value 0 See table 7 1 Always 0 reserved 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily Always 0 reserved INST SEL MDO Activate 1XEV DO MS CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Select table to edit CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 4 0 0 65535 0 1 0 1 4 0 0 43690 0 1 0 Zj2p2 1 05535 0 1 0 Selects PICH 0 16 on with full activity RRI 0 16 on I in each even numbered half slot and DATA 2 4 on Q with full activity EVDO MS Table 7 1 Examples for Activity parameter settings Dec Binary Description 65535 1111 1111 1111 1111 Channel is active in each half slot e g DATA 43690 1010 1010 1010 1010 Channel is active in half slot 0 2 4 etc e g RRI 24576 0110 0000 0000 0000 Channel is active in half slot 1 and 2 e g DRC Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 241 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis b al CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table Select the channel table you want to delete using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Example
28. R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg 6 3 2 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an opti mum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below the reference level Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 289 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency menu It is pos sible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provi ded in the corresponding softkey description Lei 147 OP SUC EE 147 Ue KE E EE 148 L 0 1 RBW span SD ME 148 GE 148 GE 148 L EE 148 Cy REW E 149 GE EE 149 TT EE 149 i 0 EE 149 EE 149 PHO E 149 FREQUENCY OTISGE EE 149 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span Span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 s fcenter s fmax SPAN pin 2 span 0 0 Hz lt center s fmax fmax and SpanNmi
29. R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis TRACe DATA Results 7 9 17 Peak Code Domain Error The command returns two values for each half slot in the following order lt half slot number gt lt level value in dB gt The number of results corresponds to the IQ capture length The number of results is between 2 and 12 Code Domain Error 7 9 18 Code Domain Error BTS Mode The command returns three values for each code in a channel in the following order code number gt lt error power gt lt power ID Value Description Range Unit code number number of the code error power value of the composite EVM 96 power ID power indication 0 1 0 inactive channel 1 active channel The number of results corresponds to the spreading factor The spreading factor in turn depends on the selected channel types Therefore 32 value triplets are returned for PILOT and PREAMBLE channels 16 value triplets for DATA channels and 64 value triplets for MAC channels see chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 171 In addition the output depends on the mapping settings The output is either the branch the Q branch or the complex signal 7 9 19 Code Domain Error MS Mode The command returns four values for each channel in the following order code class code number gt lt error power gt lt power ID Value Description Range Unit
30. R amp S FSV K14 Spectrogram Measurement e R amp S FSV K7 Analog Demodulation and R amp S FSV K7S FM Stereo Measurements e R amp S FSV K10 GSM EDGE Measurement e R amp S FSV K30 Noise Figure Measurement e R amp S FSV K40 Phase Noise Measurement e R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started First measurements e R amp S FSV K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis e R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis e R amp S FSV K76 77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS UE Measurement e R amp S FSV K82 83 CDMA2000 BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K84 85 1xEV DO BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K91 WLAN IEEE 802 11a b g j n e R amp S FSV K93 WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM OFDMA Analysis e R amp S FSV K100 K104 EUTRA LTE Downlink Measurement Application e R amp S FSV K101 K105 EUTRA LTE Uplink Measurement Application These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument The printed manual can be ordered from Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSV by replacing modules The manual includes the following chapters Chapter 1 Performance Test Chapter 2 Adjustment Chapter 3 Repair Chap
31. Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 245 Power Starts the Signal Channel Power measurement in which the power of a single channel is determined Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 245 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 205 Adjust Ref Lvl Power Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio For details on manual settings see Settings of CP ACLR test parameters in the descrip tion of the base unit The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an opti mum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below the reference level Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 289 Ch Power ACLR Activates the Adjacent Channel Power measurement Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 119 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis LEE SS a es es ee So
32. Slot specific results The Code Results in the lower part of the table show results specific to the selected slot e Power Pilot Shows the absolute power of the Pilot channel in dBm e Power Mac Shows the absolute power of the Mac channel in dBm e Power Data Shows the absolute power of the Pilot channel in dBm e Power Preamble Shows the absolute power of the Preamble channel in dBm e Composite EVM The composite EVM is the difference between the test signal and ideal reference signal For further details refer to the Composite EVM result display e Max Power Data Shows the maximum power of the Data channel This is the highest value of the l and Q branch of the Data channel e Min Power Data Shows the minimum power of the Data channel This is the smallest value of the I and Q Branch of the Data channel e Data Mode Type Shows the modulation type of the Data channel e Active Mac Chs Shows the number of active MAC channels e Active Data Chs Shows the number of active Data channels e Preamble Length Shows the length of the preamble in chips If no preamble is present in the slot this value is 0 e Rho Shows the quality parameter RHO calculated over a slot According to the standard RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideally generated reference signal It is measured over all slots e Max Inactive Power Mac Shows the maximum power of inactive Mac channels This is the highest inactive
33. e Standard W CDMA 3GPP e LinkDirection DL e PowerClass 39 43 dBm The PowerClass element It is embedded in the BaseFormat element and contains settings information about the power classes Up to four different power classes can be defined For details refer to the Sweep List softkey Sweep List on page 129 and the corresponding parameter description The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 6 13 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 180 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a SS SSS a Further Information The Range element This element is embedded in the PowerClass element It contains the settings infor mation of the range There have to be at least three defined ranges one reference range and at least one range to either side of the reference range The maximum number of ranges is 20 Note that the R amp S FSV uses the same ranges in each power class There fore the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to be identical to the first power class An exception are the Start and Stop values of the two Limit nodes that are used to determine the power class Note also that there are two Limit nodes to be defined one that gives the limit in absolute values and one in relative values Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node For details refer to the Sweep List softkey Sweep List on page 129 and the
34. A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 03 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 03 0 MHz CFlowertGHz xml BW 05 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A lt 1GHz DL LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 05 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 10 0 MHz Cfhigher1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 10 0 MHz Cflower1GHz xml BW 15 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW_15_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 20 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW_20_0_MHz_CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A lt 1GHz DL Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 186 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EREECHEN Further Information Path XML file name Displayed standard character 6 4 12 istics EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 01 4 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 01 4 MHz_CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 03 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 03 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 05 0 MHz CFh
35. ADJust FREQuengcy essere nnne erret tr inet eterni n eren EISE REI NET SENSe AVERagesn COLNE rtr acere etie ber EE aeaa dees e Ee ed SE IEN Ge WVERaoe nzlGTAtecTracezl nenne senten sen nne sent nnts nitens she rnt seni rnt nenne IEN Ge IDGANDwicdtblDWwlDtb Vieo enne ementi nre enne IEN Ge IGANDwicdtblDGWwlDtb ViDeo AUTO IEN Ge IGANDwicdtblDGWwlDtb ViDeohATlo menm nn nennen rennen enne SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution esee rennen IEN Ge IDGANDwiblDWIDODTRE Solution AUTO 279 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FF T nennen menn enne 279 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATiO essent 279 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE essere 280 Ei E er Eege e e E EISE e Ree RE SENS CDPOWERCTY E SENSe CDPower ICTReshold E E er ee e el e EE SENSe GDPower l GODe ls EE 258 EISE er Re e HE 258 SENSe CDRowerLEVelADUUS te sasccisdcsecestescacsenseeb desacdaesnthch eege der satd aeeissadeha bet g eegend 259 SENSe CDPower MAPPING a iactu ttr peret nei aaa edu ERC anes 259 IEN Ge ICDPowerMMOtDe eene reiner e treten reiten etre ter terrere nnne 259 SENSe GDPower NORM lize teg gege REL UE VOR VEL SERE RUF Va eee 260 SENSe CDPower OPERGtiOn EE 260 SENSe CDPower ORDer SENSe CDPower OVERvView eese esee entente nne nnn etnia tret enns enne etn e nne te senten nnne 261 SENSe
36. An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10 IO IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 SFM Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S SPECM Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 TDS TD SCDMA base station UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 The spectrum analysis mode is implemented in the
37. BTS CTABle STATe on page 238 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 242 Inactive Channel Threshold Channel Table Settings Defines the minimum power which a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be recognized as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive The parameter is available in the Auto Search mode of the Channel Table Settings dialog box The default value is 40 dB With this value all channels with signals such as the 1xEV DO test models are located by the Code Domain Power analysis Decrease the Inactive Channel Threshold value if not all channels contained in the signal are detected Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 257 Channel Tables Channel Table Settings In this field a list of the available channel tables is shown To activate a predefined channel table select the table name by using either the touchscreen or the the cursor keys and pressing the ENTER key The selected channel table is the basis for future measure ments until you choose another or select Auto Search An active channel table must completely describe the supplied signal Using the softkeys customized channel tables can be defined or existing channel tables can be modified Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 238 New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings All three softkeys open a dialog box with the same la
38. C Code Oet accredited ee 99 E c NT 99 L Time Phase Eetmaton nnns 99 L Operation Made ern terit ageet 99 L CDP BOTAN E 100 Dee eebe 100 L EE 100 Display CON EE 101 oclo 102 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a Se C a a ee a Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Settings Overview This softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visualizes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes all of the current settings In addition you can change the current settings via this dialog box To reset all values to their default state press the Set to Default button Settings Overview K85 Long Code Mask I SH Long Code Mask Q Invert Q 0 Capture Length 6 Multi Carrier Off Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Set Count SA Enhanced Algorithm Off Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Set To Analyze 0 Multi Carrier Filter Off Ref Level 10 0 dBm Trigger Source Free Run Filter Type LowPass Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Trigger Polarity Positive Roll Off Factor J002 Preamplifier Off Trigger Offset 0 0 s Cut Off Frequency 1 25 MHz Synch EES Multi Carrier Channel Result Display Table Demodulation Configuration Search Mode Auto Search Revision Subtype 0 1 Screen A Result Summary Inactive Threshold 40 0 dB Code Order Hadamard Screen B Result Summary Normalize Off Screen C Composite Const Time Phase Est Off Screen D Channel Table Opera
39. CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate channel RELative eeuesssuss 222 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative STATe 222 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks ACbowert GTATel nennen nnns 223 EBEN 223 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper adjacent channel dur ing adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the upper lt UpperLimit gt adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power is performed Before the command th
40. Frontend Settings Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 319 Adjust Ref Lvl Frontend Settings Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 267 IQ Capture Settings This softkey opens the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Common Settings Invert Q Data Capture Settings Capture Length E Set Count H o Set To Analyze Trigger Settings Trigger Source External 6 Free Run P Trigger Polarity 6 Positive Trigger Offset 0 0 s Negative Close Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 69 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis ACIE a SS M a a Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Invert Q IQ Capture Settings Inverts the sign of the signal s Q component The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 262 Capture Length IQ Capture Settings Sets the number of slots you want to analyze The input value is always in multiples of the slots The maximum capture length is 32 The Captu
41. GDPowWer PNOFfset i ioi ap ee ene bapti e rH est bc i aet ie ee 261 SENSe CDPower PREF rernce eio rtt taaa ianiai PO Haee en baba Eee Resina oaa iaai a AE 261 SENSe CDPower QINVertl 2 etre reet te ete cede dide dete euh de Rb hana dee 262 IEN Ge ICDbPower GBANd nennen nrinne trente tre trennen etre nre tenen inneren enne 262 I Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 334 R amp S FSV K84 K85 List of Commands SENSe CDPOWErSET COUN seed EENS EENEG 262 SENSe CDPower SE TE RE 263 SENS CDPoOwer SLOT EE 263 SENSe CDPower TPM aS nie eere eere ecc t dit centennial 264 SENSe ESPectrum BWID sese nennen rtr nter inrer nnne rris 268 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHAa esses enne nennen nennen tnn s eren 269 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC S TATe seen enne enne nennen nnne nnne 268 SENSe ESPectrum HighS9Pe ed iere bete EE Seege eek dE Landaa ee 269 IGENGe EGbechum PDRE GerbRtGtore sese t en nnnr sint nnns nent renes ener nt rsen 270 IEN Ge IEGbechum DR Get GTOhe 270 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdarq esses enne enne nnne nennen nnne 270 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo essen ene neen enn 271 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth RE Goluton 270 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt COUNt IEN Ge EGbechum HANGe czangez D I ete eene nnnn enn nrnn ntn n tnnt nn
42. In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDEP see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 18 Code Domain Error BTS Mode on page 312 Symbol Constellation This result display shows the channel constellation of the modulated signal at symbol level The measurement evaluates a single code over a single slot You can select a specific code and slot with the Select softkey Symbol Constellation IQ 1 Clrw A Fig 6 11 Symbol Constellation result display Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 45 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Measurements and Result Displays The R amp S FSV K84 supports BPSK QPSK 8PSK and 16QAM modulation schemes The modulation scheme itself depends on the channel type Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 171 for further information In case of BPSK the constellation points are located on the x axis For the QPSK and 16QAM schemes the constellation points are located on neither axis Unassigned codes can be measured but the result is meaningless since these do not contain data Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CONSt see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 199 To query these
43. K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EEN Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Traffic In TRAFFIC mode all channels PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC can exist PICH and RRI are always in the signal CDP Average Result Demod Settings Activate CDP Average and the Code Domain Analysis is averaged over all slots in the set For channel type Data and Preamble this calculation assumes that preambles of different lengths do not occur in the slots If active ALL is displayed in the Slot field above the measurement screen This softkey is available for Code Domain Analysis and is required by the 1xEV DO standard Remote command SENSe CDPower AVERage on page 256 Code Power Result Demod Settings Selects for the Code Domain Power measurement whether the y values are displayed as an absolute dBm or relative dB In relative mode the reference is the total power of the channel type Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 199 Power Reference Result Demod Settings Determines the reference power for relative power measurements Pilot Channel By default the reference power is the power of the pilot channel Total Power The power is measured over one half slot The reference power is the total power of the signal for the corresponding half slot By default the power of the channels is referred to the power of the pilot channel code number 0 The power of
44. Measuring the Composite EVM eene nnne nennen nnn nennen 25 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error eeeeeeenen 26 Test Setup for Base Station and Mobile Station Tests 29 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 31 Measurements and Result Displays eene nnn 32 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements 65 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements eese 116 Further Information iere cree cerent tnter re eL eren ra on nre Ea Eed 167 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 194 NOtatlOM m 195 CAL Culate Subsystem 1 NEESS ees eain euet code nean Ine aa caa ab aS cu Ran 198 CONFigure Subsystem eese eene n nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn nine 235 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 3 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Contents eee 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 DISPlay Subsystems c0tecciecstecedes ccsetcecesicatevedeveccetencessceteeedenscuetetdesscetteedsdecertevensieeds 248 INSTrument SUDSYStOM ccccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseaeeseeeeseaeseesesseanseeeeenaes 255 SENSe SUDSYStOM EE 255 STATUS subsystem 5 rn re teteecocs ee CERS degt Duane aac ceu oaa nunc deeER 300 TRAC e Subsystem
45. Multi Carrier Filter Synch Multicarrier Settings Activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multi carrier signals If both the Enhanced Algorithm and the Multi Carrier Filter are deactivated the multi carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 243 Filter Type Synch Multicarrier Settings Selects the filter type if Multi Carrier Filter is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and a RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the mea sured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The frequency response of the low pass filter is shown below Frequency response of low pass filter Multi Carrier On JH in dB 1 D 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 O89 1 Frequency in MHz The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more settings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor and the Cut Off Frequency Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 244 Roll Off Factor Synch Multicarrier Settings Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter The roll off factor defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02
46. Press the MODE key and activate the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option 3 Start the Power measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Power softkey 4 Set the center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 878 49 MHz 5 Set the reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm On the screen the spectrum of the signal and the corresponding power levels within the 1 2288 MHz channel bandwidth are displayed In the table below the diagram the numeric values of the channel bandwidth of the TX Channel and power level of the ana lyzed signal are listed Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 11 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 3 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask To detect spurious emissions such as harmonics or intermodulation products the R amp S FSV offers a spectrum emission mask measurement The measurement compares the power against the spectrum emission mask in the range from 4 MHz to 4 MHz around the carrier The exact measurement settings like the filter that is used depend on the Band Class parameter For a list of supported bandclasses refer to the Bandclass on page 120 softkey in the Spectrum Emission Mask menu Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Stand
47. Renee Eee EI Ee er eee err eee er eee eee 104 scaling EE 156 x and y axis signal statistic 140 SCPI Conformity information s s s eeren 196 Select Channel Settings EE 71 sensitivity APD measurement s sss CCDF measurement sss MOL COU ME Eeer dee K84 remote command Set Mean to Manual ssssssseen K84 remote command esee settings Channel Table Settings K84 73 93 Result Settings K84 Result Settings K85 Select Channel Settings K84 71 Settings Overview K84 Settings Overview K85 Synch Multicarrier Settings K85 89 Settings IQ Capture Settings esses 69 87 Set to Analyze K84 remote command eese 263 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 340 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Index signal channel power EE 62 Signal Channel Power 119 Signal Source VQ Analyzer TE Remote control SOfIKOV nieder t rr Slot K84 remote commande 263 Slot selection of 0 1 SPAN ze oer eter ter tt et eed ete e 148 0 5 S RBW icti Guz etre ee eee etd 148 0 5 RBW remote control 282 283 0 5 Span 0 5 Span remote control of Adj Chan tette of Adj Chan remote control 2 of Sa
48. SENSe ESPect rum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 273 e Rf Attenuation see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation on page 273 e Preamp see SENSe ESPect rum RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe on page 274 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 269 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem Example ESP HSP ON SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard This command selects the specified XML file under C r_s instr sem_std If the file is stored in a subdirectory include the relative path Example ESP PRES WCDMA 3GPP DL PowerClass 31 39 xml Selects the PowerClass 31 39 xml XML file in the C R_S instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP DL directory ESP PRES W CDMA 3GPP DL 31 39 dBm The query returns information about the selected standard the link direction and the power class If no standard has been selected the query returns None SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore This command copies the XML files from the C NR SNinstrNsem backup folder to the C NR SNinstrNsem std folder Files of the same name are overwritten Example ESP PRES REST Restores the originally provided XML files SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe lt FileName gt This command stores the current settings as presettings in the specified XML file under C Nr sNinstrNsem backup
49. SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt DELete This command deletes the specified range The range numbers are updated accordingly The reference range cannot be deleted A minimum of three ranges is mandatory Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Example ESP RANG4 DEL Deletes range 4 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE Type This command sets the filter type for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 271 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SS ESE SSS a eS SENSe Subsystem Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Type gt NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters PULSe EMI 6dB filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORM The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data sheet Example ESP RANG1 FILT TYPE RRC Sets the RRC filter type for range 1 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt Frequency This command sets the start frequency for the specified range In order to change the start stop frequency of the first last range select the appropriate span If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measure ment includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz Th
50. Spanmin fins fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 283 Stop Opens an edit dialog box to define the stop frequency The following range of values for the stop frequency is allowed fmin SpanNmin E Fstop ES fmax f min f max and SpaNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 284 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 149 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 3 3 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 283 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Span menu for RF meas urements except for Power and Power vs Time measurements e UE TU 150 owesb me Manual trier erkennen tr een e n o D You acting e RE nn 150 UE mI 151 Last e e rrr err rere ve eee ea ce ere ee eie aa ee ek dere ee ee ue ERE Ee 151 Span Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency span The center frequency remains the same when yo
51. TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Range Log Manual x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis manually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Range Linear x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Selects linear scaling for the level axis in The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in 9o referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default setting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Range Lin Unit x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 142 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis DEE Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command
52. The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the current frequency span according to the relationship between frequency span and resolution bandwidth The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz 9 kHz and 120 kHz and the channel filters available are not set by the automatic coupling Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio to define the ratio RBW span Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example BAND AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT lt FilterMode gt This command defines the filter mode of FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis This command is only available for sweep type FFT Parameters lt FilterMode gt AUTO The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best measurement results NARRow The FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced ref erence level due to a narrower analog prefilter RST AUTO Example BAND TYPE FFT Select FFT filter Example BAND FFT NARR Select narrow partial span for FFT filter SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio lt Ratio gt This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth Hz and the span Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command RBW span is re
53. The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sam ple detector is used see chapter 6 4 4 Detector Overview on page 173 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or refer
54. dialog box 6 Set an external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Set the Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the diagram of the Peak Code Domain Error In screen B the result summary is displayed Displaying RHO Make sure that all channels except the pilot channel code 0 64 are OFF so that only the pilot channel is available in the measurement No specific measurement is required to get the value for RHO The R amp S FSV always calculates this value automatically regardless of the code domain measurement per formed Besides the results of the code domain measurements the numeric result of the RHO measurement is shown in the result summary by default shown in screen B Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 19 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 DEE Measuring the Signal Channel Power 4 Measurement Examples forthe 1XxEV DO MS 4 1 Analysis K85 Measuring the Signal Channel Power In the Power measurement the total channel power of the 1xEV DO signal is displayed The measurement also displays spurious emissions like harmonics or intermodulation products that occur close to the carrier Test setup e Connect the RF output ofthe signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 833
55. its state must be different from blank Note The measurement of the occupied bandwidth OBW is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To evaluate another trace marker 1 must be positioned to another trace with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1to6 Example POW TRAC 2 Assigns the measurement to trace 2 SENSe SWEep subsystem SENSE SWE P COUNT 5 iio a c Eua asd ese nage ee pe MB Recon ER OI EM BRRO ID aiD 294 KE E E 294 EE e e E RE 295 ISENSe ISWESD IEGATGEENG ER 295 SENSE lut enEGATebOL aty eee eeeaeaea aaa een enhn nennt anaa nennen 295 SENSeJSWEGp EGATESOURGO seed iaa a a aai EAA 295 IGENGelGuwEentGATeTRACeck CGOMMent eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaaaeenenenes 296 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRAGe lt k gt PERIO 0 ccc cccecceneseeesseceeteeneneeenneecenaedanaeneeuadeneds 296 IGENGelGwWEentGATe RACeck GTAbRtorangez nene 296 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe range sese 296 SENSeEJSWESeREGATeT YPE EE 297 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt GTOborange z nennen 297 SENSE SWESp e CT 298 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 293 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep TIME ecce ttntnntttetnttnetttetettettte s t tot tette ss 298 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO ENEE 298 ISENSel WwWEepTept E 298 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt NumberSweeps gt This command defines the num
56. range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RANG3 SWE TIME AUTO OFF Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer lt TransducerName gt This command sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a trans ducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range e The x axis is linear e The unit is dB Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt TransducerName gt string name of the transducer Example ESP RANG1 TRAN test Sets the transducer called test for range 1 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 277 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 6 2 3 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum RRANge This command returns the current position number of the reference range Example ESP RRAN Returns the current position number of the reference range SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe Type This command sets the power reference type Parameters Type PEAK CPOWer PEAK Measures the highest peak within the reference range CPOWer Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method RST CPOWer Example
57. 02 08 248 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command enlargens the measurement window indicated by the suffix to full screen The result display of the screen is by default the same as that of the first measurement screen Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Size gt SMALI LARGe RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 SIZE LARG Maximizes the second measurement screen Mode CDMA EVDO DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SSELect This command selects which window screen is active Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters RST 1 Example DISP WIND1 SSEL Sets the window 1 active Mode CDMA EVDO DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe State Activates deactivates the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP WIND3 STAT ON Turns on a third measurement screen Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 249 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe
58. 0766 02 08 58 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis DEET 6 1 4 12 6 1 4 13 Measurements and Result Displays Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 21 EVM vs Symbol on page 313 Composite Constellation This result display provides information about the constellation points at chip level For each chip a constellation point is displayed in the diagram The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single half slot Composite Constellation ei Clrw Fig 6 25 Composite Constellation result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP COMP CONSt see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 22 Composite Constellation on page 314 Channel Bitstream This result display provides information on the demodulated bits for the selected channel type All bits that are part of inactive channels are marked as being invalid by means of dashes For 64QAM modulation is displayed for 16QAM modulation for 8PSK modulation for QPSK and for BPSK The mea
59. 15 16 17 21 22 0 800 MHz band 1 1900 MHz PCS 2 TACS band 3 3A JTACS band see Bandclass on page 120 4 Korean PCS band 5 450 MHz NMT 6 2 GHz IMT 2000 7 700 MHz band 8 1800 MHz band 9 900 MHz band 10 Secondary 800 MHz band 11 400 MHz European PAMR band 12 800 MHz PAMR band 13 2 5 GHz IMT2000 Extension 14 US PCS 1 9GHz Band 15 AWS Band 16 US 2 5 GHz 17 US 2 5 GHz 21 3B JTACS band see Bandclass on page 120 22 3C JTACS band see Bandclass on page 120 RST 0 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 237 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis a M CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP BCL 1 Selects band class 1 1900 MHz Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe State This command activates or deactivates the RECENT channel table To select another channel table use the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP CTAB OFF Deactivates the RECENT channel table and activates a prede fined channel table CONF CDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure C DPower BTS CTABle CATalog This command queries the names of all the channel tables stored on the flash disk for the current application CDMA 1xEVDO Parameters lt sum of file sizes of all subsequent files gt lt spare stor
60. 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Power gt 33 28 0 33 P233 28 28 P 33 0 P 28 RST 0 Example CALC LIM ESP VAL 33 Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit line for P 33 CALCulate PSE subsystem CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate 2 sese 228 CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbGtarch AUTO 229 CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbpGtarch MAI 229 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarchiPSHOW cccsccceceseeasendaccudecasssaeadaccacecenaaanancecdaaeasaes 229 CAL Culate nzPDEAksearchlbGtarch GUlDbanges semen 230 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate This command switches the spurious limit check off If you want to read out the values peak values including the delta to a limit you have to Switch on the limit again This command is only for FSP compatibility and not necessary to use on the R amp S FSV Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 228 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC PSE Starts to determine the list CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CALC ESP PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch
61. 7 2 4 3 7 2 4 4 7 2 4 5 7 2 4 6 CALCulate Subsystem lt numeric_value gt lt num gt These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted e MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value e MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value e DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e UP This keyword increments the parameter value e DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by add ing the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result arbitrary block program data This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block CALCulate Subsystem The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data trans forming and carrying out corrections These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquisition i e following the SENSe subsystem Note that most commands in the CALCulate subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here CALGulate FEED S bsys
62. 9 1 4 15 52 5 0 Programming Examples CDP ORD BITR Set order to BitReverse TRAC TRACE1L Read out CDP relative BitReverse Q Sorting is changed in accordance with BitReverse de 07 9335 3 4 8 52 4 0 PICH is quasi inactive 4 4 51 2 0 4 12 51 8 0 2 2 10 0 1 Channel 2 4 is now consolidated and 4 1 52 3 0 4 8 55 5 0 displayed with accumulated power 45 5y 55 1 0 4 13 57 6 0 4 3 54 6 0 4 11 54 3 0 4 951 350 4 15 52 5 0 CDP OVER ON Activate Overview mode CDP relative on Screen A I branch CDP relative on Screen B Q branch TRAC TRACEI Read out CDP relative of I branch 4 0r site Le 4 8 54 2 0 PICH is active 4 4 56 7 0 4 125 554340 4 2 48 3 3 4 10 48 1 3 DATA 2 4 is quasi inactive 4 6 49 0 3 4 14 48 5 3 4 15 54 4 0 4 9 4 55 2 0 4 5 51 2 0 4 13 54 3 0 4 3 54 5 0 4 11 55 7 05 4 7 56 6 0 4 15 52 3 0 TRAC TRACE2 Read out CDP relative of Q branch 4 05 75343 3 45 85 52 4 0 PICH is quasi inactive 4 4 51 2 0 4 12 51 8 0 2 2 10 0 1 Channel 2 4 is now consolidated and 4 1 52 35 0 4 9 55 5 0 displayed with accumulated power 4 5 55 1 0 4 13 57 6 0 4 3 54 6 0 4 11 54 3 0 4 ect 35 05 4 15 52 5 0 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Status Reporting System of the 1xEV DO Analysis 8 Status Reporting System of the 1xEV DO Analysis Detailed information on the status registers of
63. CDA Measurements If both the Enhanced Algorithm and the Multi Carrier Filter on page 80 are deactivated the multi carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 244 Multi Carrier Filter Result Settings Activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multi carrier signals If both the Enhanced Algorithm on page 79 and the Multi Carrier Filter are deactivated the multi carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 243 Filter Type Result Settings Selects the filter type if Multi Carrier Filter on page 80 is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and a RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the mea sured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The frequency response of the low pass filter is shown below Frequency response of low pass filter Multi Carrier On IH f in dB hb 1 1 D 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 09 1 Frequency in MHz The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more settings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor on page 80 and the Cut Off Frequency on page 81 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 243 Roll Off Factor Result Settings Def
64. Commands GALGulate lt n gt MARKErsm gt TRACE c lt cca ec ccneccaseeedcadecaassncdacsdcvancieddadsdateandiadedaacseccedsdade 234 CAL Culate nzEGbechum P GtarchlpEAksearch PGtow sees 234 GAECulatespnsTHReshbeld eir ox eom EE ee A 234 CALCUlate TAUNT POWE Seege ee aided ee aiden nace A 235 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt Trace gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow lt State gt This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares CALCulate lt n gt THReshold lt Threshold gt This command defines a threshold value for the marker peak search A threshold line is automatically turned on Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Threshold gt The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer RST STATe to OFF Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 234
65. DIQ SRAT AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines the electronic attenuation If necessary the command also turns the electronic attenuator on This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 318 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis ee ee SS ee Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt Attenuation gt 0 25 RST 0 dB OFF Example INP1 EATT 10 dB Mode all INPut EATT AUTO State This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off If activated electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenu ation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example INP1 EATT AUTO OFF Mode all INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is
66. DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 y Axis Max Value Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 233 y Axis Min Value Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range Val ues in the range fe value 0 1 are allowed The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 233 y Unit Abs Scaling CCDF Defines the scaling type of the y axis The default value is absolute scaling Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 233 Default Settings Scaling CCDF Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values x axis ref level 10 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 231 Adjust Settings Scaling CCDF Adjusts the level settings according
67. DO Analysis e chapter 7 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis on page 194 Describes all remote control commands defined for the code domain measurement An alphabetic list of all remote control commands and a table of softkeys with the assignment of commands are provided at the end of this chapter e chapter 8 Status Reporting System of the 1xEV DO Analysis on page 330 Contains device specific error messages for R amp S FSV K84 K85 This part of the documentation includes only functions of the Application Firmware R amp S FSV K84 K85 For all other descriptions please refer to the description of the base unit Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 10 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 EE Measuring the Signal Channel Power 3 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 3 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power In the Power measurement the total channel power of the 1xEV DO signal is displayed The measurement also displays spurious emissions like harmonics or intermodulation products that occur close to the carrier Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode a
68. ESP RTYP PEAK Sets the peak power reference type SENSe BANDwidth subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution cnc 278 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO ecccccntntntn tette 279 IGENSeBANDwOIBWIDONERESoluontEET ttn 279 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATiO ecccncntt tnnt 279 ISENSeBANDwWOIBWIDONERESoluontTEE ttt 280 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VlIDeo ence tentent tente tentent 280 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO eccccetn ttt tnter 280 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio e ccce tetententntettntentetns 281 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE eecccencrtettet tent tte tente tententtis 281 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 176 Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 278 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO lt State gt This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span
69. FSV 85 options for CDA measurements The Lines menu is not available in the 1xEV DO Analysis modes The Span menu is not available for code domain measurements and signal power measurements The Bandwidth menu is not available for code domain measurements All menus not described here are the same as for the base unit see the description there Importing and Exporting UO Data UO data can be imported from a file for processing in R amp S FSV K84 K85 and captured 1 Q data can be stored to a file IQ Import IQ Export softkeys in the Save Rcl menu For details see the base unit description To display help to a softkey press the HELP key and then the softkey for which you want to display help To close the help window press the ESC key For further information refer to chapter 1 3 How to Use the Help System on page 8 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer menu in BTS mode sess 66 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu in MS Mode 83 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu for CDA Measurements 103 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for CDA Measurements sss 104 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu for CDA Measurements 107 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA Measurements nrnna 108 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 65 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EENS Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements 6 2 7 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurements
70. HYSTeresis Value This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 321 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis ee E Other Commands Referenced in this Manual TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Delay gt This command defines the length of the trigger delay A negative delay time pretrigger can be set in zero span only Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Delay gt Range zero span sweeptime see data sheet to 30 s span 0 to 30s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt TriggerLevel gt This command sets the level of the external trigger source in Volt Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe Type This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Type POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURCce Source This command selects the trigg
71. Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual TX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital output to a connected device Transmitter Type RX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital input from a connected device Receiver Type Send To EXIQ The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R amp S EX IQ BOX Firmware Update EXIQ If a firmware update for the R amp S EX IQ BOX is delivered with the R amp S FSV firmware this function is available In this case when you select the softkey the firmware update is performed R amp S Support EXIQ Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instrument If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster DiglConf EXIQ Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is only available if the optional software is installed Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 115 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 3 6 3 1 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements To return to the R amp S FSV application press any key on the front panel The application is displayed w
72. Measurements The default value is 3 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 258 Set Count IQ Capture Settings Defines the number of consecutive sets to be stored in the instrument s IQ memory One set consists of 32 slots The R amp S FSV can capture up to 15680 slots about 26 seconds in a single sweep i e the possible value range is from 1 to 490 sets The default setting is 1 In that case you can still define the number of slots see Capture Length In case you want to capture more than one set the capture length is always 32 The R amp S FSV automatically sets the capture length to 32 and the Capture Length field is not available for modification Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 262 Set to Analyze IQ Capture Settings Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range depends on the Set Count and is between 0 and Set Count 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET VALue on page 263 Trigger Source Free Run IQ Capture Settings The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 322 Trigger Source External IQ Capture Settings Defines triggering via a
73. Menus for RF Measurements ative levels If both limits are active and if the higher of both limit values is exceeded the measured value is marked by a preceding asterisk Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult on page 220 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative on page 222 Relative Limit Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Defines a limit relative to the carrier signal Remote command CALC LIM ACP ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe on page 223 CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt OdBc 0dBc CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt STAT ON Absolute Limit Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Defines an absolute limit Remote command CALC LIM ACP ON see CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower STATe on page 223 CALC LIM ACP adjacent channel ABS 10dBm 10dBm CALC LIM ACP adjacent channel ABS STAT ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe on page 218 Check Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate or deactivate the limit to be considered during a limit check The check of both limit values can be activated independently Chan Pwr Hz CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If deactivated the channel po
74. Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 189 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Example Sweep List Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Further Information Range Start 12 75 MHz Range Stop Filter Type Sweep Time Ref Level RF Att Mode RF Attenuator Preamp Transd Factor Limit Check 1 Abs Limit Start 1 Abs Limit Stop 1 Channel 1 MHz 10 MHz 10 ms 10 dBm Auto 10 dB Off None Absolute 23 5 dBm 23 5 dBm 8 MHz 4 MHz None Absolute 19 5 dBm 19 5 dBm Gaussian 30 kHz 10 MHz 30 ms 10 dBm Auto 10 dB Off None None Absolute Absolute Absolute 32 5 dBm 32 5 dBm 20 5 dBm 32 5 dBm 20 5 dBm 20 5 dBm Rel Limit Start 1 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc Rel Limit Stop 1 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc Limit Check 2 Relative Relative m sms sn Relative Relative Relative Fig 6 30 Sweep list using Fast SEM mode In figure 6 30 a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated The formerly 5 separately defined ranges are combined to 2 sweep ranges internally 6 4 14 Predefined CP ACLR Standards When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement the test parameters for the channel and adjacent channel measurements are configured automatically The availa ble standards are listed
75. PCLass lt Class gt MINimum lt Level gt This command sets the minimum lower level limit for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always start at 200 dBn i e the first lower limit can not be set If more than one power class is in use the lower limit must equal the upper limit of the previous power class Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric_value gt RST 200 for class1 otherwise 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL2 MIN 40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to 40 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the factory set values are restored Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 227 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE 7 2 4 4 CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Example CALC LIM ESP REST Resets the limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask to the default setting CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum VALue lt Power gt This command activates the manual limit line selection and specifies the expected power as a value Depending on the entered value one of the predefined limit lines is selected Suffix lt n gt 1
76. PSEarch MARGin lt Margin gt This command sets the margin used for the limit check peak search Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt Margin gt 200 to 200 dB RST 200 dB Example CALC ESP PSE MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHow This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 229 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges lt NumberPeaks gt This command sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list Once the selected number of peaks has been reached the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt NumberPeaks gt 1 to 50 RST 25 Example CALC PSE SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list 7 2 4 5 CALCulate STATistics subsystem CAL Culate nz GTATiettce CCDETSTATel teens nn ns 230 CAL Culate lt n STATisties NSAMpleS inniinn RR n RR ets ARE RR Oen ADR dae 230 GALGulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet tese ruentes SNE aab enc d a n aad g nae nada 231 CAL Culate nzGTATletcebREGultTracez naa nnoonrer
77. Q aeu pecu cc c c ddLFRrrFMC M m eii Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 169 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Information Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 16QAM 1 16 16QAM 2 16 16QAM 13 16 16QAM 14 16 16QAM 15 16 16QAM Table 6 6 Base station test model DO IDLE for idle slot configuration Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I Table 6 7 Mobile station channel table PICH Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 1111 1111 1111 1111 Table 6 8 Mobile station channel table PICHRRI Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 1111 1111 1111 1111 RRI 0 16 l 1010 1010 1010 1010 Table 6 9 Mobile station channel table 5CHANS Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 l 1111 1111 1111 1111 RRI 0 16 l 1010 1010 1010 1010 DATA 2 4 Q 1111 1111 1111 1111 ACK 4 8 l 0000 0000 0000 1000 DRC 8 16 Q 0110 0000 0000 0000 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 170 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis BRE
78. R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 3 7 3 1 CONFigure Subsystem Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm CONFigure Subsystem The CONFigure subsystem contains commands for configuring the measurements CONFigure CDPower Subsystem K82 K84 This subsystem contains the commands for measurement selection and configuration Further setting commands for the spectrum emission mask measurement are described in the CALCulate ESPectrum subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDCIasS 2 0 c eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceseneeeaeaeneneneeeeeens 236 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STAT ccccecccneceeteeeeeeeenaeeaecaaeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeaeans 238 CONFloure CDbowerf BITGlCTAbBleCATalog nennen nnn 238 CONFloure CDbPower BTGlCTABleCOMMent neret 238 GONFigure CDPower BTS CEABleXCOBY 2 ecciesie Staines ea ette ee Hb uada Te vise 239 CONFigure GDPower BTS CTABle DATA ertet rnnt rre a aaia 239 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA csse nennen nhanh nr nennen 240 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete eite r
79. ROFF 0 05 Sets the roll off factor to 0 05 Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE Type This command sets the filter type to be used in multi carrier mode You can set the parameters for the RRC filter with the CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 243 and CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 243 commands Parameters Type LPASs RCC RST LPAS Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo State This command activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm for the filters in multi carrier mode Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR MALG OFF Deactivates the enhanced algorithm Mode CDMA EVDO Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 244 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement lt Measurement gt This command selects the measurement type Parameters lt Measurement gt ACLR CCDF CDPower ESPectrum OBWidth POWer ACLR Adjacent Channel Power m
80. S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 RST RF Example INP SEL RF Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN TRIGger Commands TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 320 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis ee eS SSS ee Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Mode All TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Mode all TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Value This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower
81. STATe ON EVDO CONFigure C DPower BTS PVTime LIST RESult Queries the list evaluation results The results are a comma separated list containing the following values for each list range Return values lt RangeNo gt lt StartTime gt lt StopTime gt lt AverageDBM gt lt AverageDB gt lt MaxDBM gt lt MaxDB gt lt MinDBM gt lt MinDB gt lt LimitCheck gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt Usage Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 consecutive number of list range Start time of the individual list range Stop time of the individual list range Average power level in list range in dBm Average power level in list range in dB Maximum power level in list range in dBm Maximum power level in list range in dB Minimum power level in list range in dBm Minimum power level in list range in dB Result of limit check for the list range 0 Passed 1 Failed 0 currently not used 0 currently not used Query only 246 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS REVision lt SignalType gt With this command you define which revision type the signal to be analyzed has Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For newer programs and for subtype 3 use the CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 247 com mand Parameters lt SignalType gt OJA 0 subtype 0 1 A subtype 2 RST 0 Example CONF CDP R
82. Subt 3 16 76 8 ksps 64QAM DataNettoChips QPSK 8 PSK 16QAM 64QAM 1600 0 1600 100 200 300 400 500 1600 64 1536 96 192 288 384 480 1600 128 1472 92 184 276 368 460 1600 256 1344 84 168 252 336 420 1600 512 1088 68 136 204 272 340 1600 1024 576 36 72 104 144 180 6 4 4 Detector Overview The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set automatically by the R amp S FSV The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace display field by an abbreviation The detectors of the R amp S FSV are implemented as pure digital devices They collect signal power data within each measured point during a sweep The default number of sweep points is 691 The following detectors are available Table 6 10 Detector types Detector Indicator Function Auto Peak Ap Determines the maximum and the minimum value within a measurement point not available for SEM Positive Peak Pk Determines the maximum value within a measure ment point Negative Peak min peak Mi Determines the minimum value within a measurement point RMS Rm Determines the root mean square power within a measurement point Average Av Determines the linear average power within a mea surement point Sample Sa Selects the last value within a measurement point The result obtained from the selected detector within a measurement point is displayed as the power
83. Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters Mode WRITe MAXHold WRITe The channel power and the adjacent channel powers are calcu lated directly from the current trace MAXHold The power values are calculated from the current trace and com pared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm Example CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE MAXH Sets the Maxhold channel power mode CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the result of the performed power measurement in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt If necessary the measurement is switched on prior to the query The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem To obtain a correct result a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed before a query is output Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode Suffix n Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 205 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis lt m gt Parameters lt ResultType gt CALCulate Subsystem Selects the marker ACPower CPOWer ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement Results are output in the following sequence separated by com mas Power of transmission channel Power of lower adjacent channel Power of upper adjacent channe
84. The following values are set x axis ref level 20 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC STAT PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt Trace gt lt ResultType gt This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt Trace gt 1 6 trace Parameters lt ResultType gt MEAN PEAK CFACtor ALL MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined CREST factor ratio of peak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor The required result is selected via the following parameters Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 231 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm CREST factor 13 69 dB CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the measured peak power in
85. The higher value is retained If activated the enhancement label Pwr Max is displayed Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE MAXH See CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 205 Select Trace CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trace number on which the CP ACLR measurement is to be performed Only activated traces can be selected For details on trace modes see chapter 6 4 5 Trace Mode Overview on page 174 Remote command SENSe POWer TRACe on page 293 ACLR Abs Rel CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Switches between absolute and relative power measurement in the adjacent channels Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dByV Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE on page 288 Adjust Settings CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing within a specific frequency range channel band width The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later For details on the settings of span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector and trace averaging see chapter 6 4 15 Optim
86. and 1500 It depends on the channel type and in case of Preamble and Data channels on the length of the preamble Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 171 for further information The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot Composite Constellation et Clrw Fig 6 13 Composite Constellation result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP COMP CONSt see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 22 Composite Constellation on page 314 Code Domain Analysis Results MS Mode Basically the measurement results for code domain analysis are very similar for base station and mobile station tests The main difference is that while base station tests are performed on slots mobile station tests are performed on half slots Furthermore mobile station tests provide measurements on composite data For these measurements a special channel contains two codes whose results are displayed simultaneously These measurements are only available for subtypes 2 or higher The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result display configurations for mobile station measurements in the code domain Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 47 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 0 6 1 4 1
87. are balanced gt Onthe signal generator change the center frequency in steps of 0 1 kHz and observe the analyzer screen Up to a frequency error of approximately 1 0 kHz a Code Domain Power measure ment on the R amp S FSV is still possible A frequency error within this range causes no apparent difference in the accuracy of the Code Domain Power measurement In case of a frequency error of more than 1 0 kHz the probability of incorrect syn chronization increases This is indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message If the frequency error exceeds approximately 1 5 kHz a Code Domain Power mea surement cannot be performed This is also indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message Reset the center frequency of the signal generator to 878 49 MHz Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 14 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 0 3 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power The center frequency of the DUT should not deviate by more than 1 0 kHz from that of the R amp S FSV Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power Ifthe code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a section of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts to detect the start of a slot To detect this start all possibilities of the PN sequence location have to be tested in Free Run trigger mode This requires computing time This computing tim
88. are limited or preset e g F PICH F TDPICH and F PDCH Symbol Rate ksps Display of the symbol rate Modulation Enter the modulation type for the channel Power dB Contains the measured relative code domain power The unit is dB The fields are filled with values after pressing the Meas on page 76 softkey nac pecu P c E D c p d Lu M i Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 95 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Item Description State Indicates whether a channel is active or inactive DomainConflict A red bullet indicates if there s a conflict of any sorts between two or more channels e g two conflicting channel codes Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 242 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY on page 239 Add Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Inserts a new channel below the one selected For a description of the parameters of the channel refer to the New Copy Edit softkey The default values for a new channel are ChannelType MAC Walsh Ch SF 2 64 Sym Rate ksps 19 2 ksps automatically calculated Modulation BPSK I Power dB 0 dB automatically calculated State Off DomainConflict No automatically calculated To change the channel type use the dropdown menu that opens
89. band class Beneath the measurement screens the bandwidth and power of the TX channel and the bandwidth spacing and power of the adjacent and alternate channels are dis played The default settings are in accordance with the 3GPP2 specifications Setting Default value Adjacent Channel Power On ACP Standard 1xEV DOO MC1 Number of adjacent channels 2 For details on the softkeys of the Adjacent Channel Power measurement refer to the Ch Power ACLR on page 119 softkey in the Measurement menu Spectrum Emission Mask The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spectral mask that is defined by the 3GPP2 specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass In this way the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note that the 3GPP2 standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emis sions Beneath the measurement screen a table showing the peak list In the peak list the values for the worst spectral emissions are displayed including their frequency and power The default settings of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement are listed in the table below Setting Default value Frequency Span 8 MHz Sweep Time 100 ms Detector RMS For details on the softkeys of the Spectrum Emission Mask measuremen
90. below ES command Predefined standards are selected using the CP ACLR Standard softkey or the CALC MARK FUNC POW PRI W CDMA 3 84 MHz reverse W CDMA 3GPP REV RW3G Standard GUl Parameter SCPI Parameter EUTRA LTE Square EUTRA LTE Square EUTRa EUTRA LTE Square RRC EUTRA LTE Square RRC REUTRa W CDMA 3 84 MHz forward W CDMA 3GPP FWD FW3G Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 190 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a U A smmr Further Information Standard GUI Parameter SCPI Parameter CDMA IS95A forward CDMA IS95A FWD F8CD FIS95a CDMA IS95A reverse CDMA IS95A REV R8CD RIS95a CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD FIS95c0 CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV RIS95c0 CDMA J STD008 forward CDMA J STD008 FWD F19C FJ008 CDMA J STD008 reverse CDMA J STD008 REV R19C RJO08 CDMA IS95C Class 1 forward CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD FIS95c1 CDMA IS95C Class 1 reverse CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV RIS95c1 CDMA 2000 CDMA 2000 S2CD TD SCDMA forward TD SCDMA FWD FTCD TCDMa TD SCDMA reverse TD SCDMA REV RTCD WLAN 802 11A WLAN 802 11A AWLan WLAN 802 11B WLAN 802 11B BWLan WiMAX WiMAX WiMAX WIBRO WIBRO WIBRO GSM GSM GSM
91. channel from the l and Q branch of the MAC channels The power is displayed rel ative to the absolute power of the MAC channel Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 37 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE 6 1 3 3 Measurements and Result Displays Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 201 Channel Results The Channel Results show the data of various measurements in numerical form for a specific channel Channel Result I ei Clrw 4 30 79 dBm Fig 6 3 Channel results result display Channel results The Channel Results show common results for the selected channel e Power Shows the total power of the selected channel type e JO Imbalance Shows the IQ imbalance of the signal in percent e Pk CDE SF xx IQ The Peak Code Domain Error measurement specifies a projection of the difference between test signal and ideal reference signal to the spreading factor that belongs to the channel type This spreading factor is shown in brackets e IQ Offset Shows the DC offset of the signal in percent Code results The Code Results show results specific to the selected channel type and the sele
92. channel spacings for the TX channels and for the adjacent channels e TXchannels left column TX1 2 spacing between the first and the second carrier TX2 3 spacing between the second and the third carrier The spacings between all adjacent TX channels can be defined separately When you change the spacing for one channel the value is automatically also defined for all sub sequent TX channels in order to set up a system with equal TX channel spacing quickly For different spacings a setup from top to bottom is necessary If the spacings are not equal the channel distribution according to the center frequency is as follows Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 123 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the frequency between those two channels This frequency is aligned to the center frequency Adjacent channels right column Since all the adjacent channels often have the same distance to each other the modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same fac tor new spacing value old spacing value Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equa
93. channel to be measured and around it has a flat characteristic In the standard setting e g for standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz a resolution band width of 30 kHz is used This yields correct results since the spectrum in the neigh borhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level With the exception of the IS95 CDMA standards the Adjust Settings softkey sets the resolution bandwidth RBW as a function of the channel bandwidth RBW s 1 40 of channel bandwidth The maximum possible resolution bandwidth with respect to the requirement RBW 1 40 resulting from the available RBW steps 1 3 is selected e Video bandwidth VBW For a correct power measurement the video signal must not be limited in bandwidth A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power 2 51 dB at very low video band widths The video bandwidth should therefore be selected at least three times the resolution bandwidth VBW 2 3 x RBW The Adjust Settings softkey sets the video bandwidth VBW as a function of the channel bandwidth see formula above and the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size will be selected e Detector Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 192 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis BREET Further Information The Adjust Settings softkey selects the RMS dete
94. command seen 245 Restore Default Channel Tables C D 77 97 Restore STD Liries er rore 146 K84 remote command sese 209 Result Display Bitstream BE Channel Bitstream Channel Results K84 85 remote 303 305 Channel Results K84 esses Channel Table K84 85 remote Channel Table K84 see Channel Table K85 sese Code Domain Error Power K84 85 remote Code Domain Error Power K84 Code Domain Error Power K85 Code Domain Power 35 48 302 Composite Constellation K84 85 remote 314 Composite Constellation K84 Composite Constellation K85 S Composite Data Bitstream K85 remote 307 Composite Data Constellation K85 remote 307 Composite Data Constellation K85 56 Composite Data EVM K85 remote aeeeeeeeeee 307 Composite EVM K84 85 remote Composite EVM K84 seem 40 Composite EVM K85 sees 53 55 EVM vs Symbol K84 85 remote m EVM vs Symbol K84 sss 46 EVM vs Symbol K85 sese 58 General Results K84 85 remote 303 305 General Results K84 esses 36 General Results K85
95. corre sponding parameter description The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 6 14 The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a child node or attribute is mandatory for the R amp S FSV to interpret the file or not Since the hierarchy of the XML can not be seen in the tables either view one of the default files already stored on the R amp S FSV in the C r_s instr sem_std directory or check the structure as shown below Below a basic example of the structure of the file is shown containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes Note that the PowerClass element and the range element are themselves elements of the BaseFormat element and are to be inserted where noted The separation is done here simply for reasons of a better overview Also no example values are given here to allow a quick reference to the tables above Italic font shows the placeholders for the values e The BaseFormat element is structured as follows RS SEM ACP FileFormat Version 1 0 0 0 gt lt Name gt Standard lt Name gt lt Instrument gt lt Type gt Instrument Type Type lt Application gt Application lt Application gt lt Instrument gt lt LinkDirection Name Name gt lt ReferencePower gt lt Method gt Method lt Method gt lt ReferencePower gt PowerClass Index n gt I For contents of the PowerClass node see table 6 13 gt lt Define
96. covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 279 Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW lt 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 279 Coupling Ratio Opens a submenu to select the coupling ratios for functions coupled to the bandwidth This softkey and its submenu is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF RBW VBW Sine 1 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth video bandwidth This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 281 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 160 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a aS SSS SS se ee Softkeys and Menus for RF
97. dialog box b Set the Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default Screen A shows the diagram of the Composite EVM measurement result In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the Code Domain Power measurement includ ing the values for the Composite EVM Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vector represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal The Code Domain Error is the difference in power on symbol level of the measured and the reference signal projected to the class of of the base spreading factor The unit of the result is dB In the Peak Code Domain Error PCDE measurement the maximum error value over all channels is determined and displayed for a given slot The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the slots and the y axis shows the PCDE values A measurement of the RHO factor is shown in the second part of the example RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference signal The maximum value of RHO is 1 In that case the measured signal and the reference signal are identical When measuring RHO it i
98. dialog box to select a specific bandclass For a list of predefined bandclasses refer to the Bandclass softkey in the ACP menu Bandclass on page 120 The settings for each bandclass are provided in xml files that are located in the directory C R_S INSTR sem_std evdo dl The files themselves are named DO DL BCO1 XML bandclass 1 to DO DL BC17 XML bandclass 17 By selecting one of the bandclasses from the dialog box the correct file is loaded automatically The file can also be loaded manually see Load Standard softkey Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 236 Load Standard Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to select an XML file which includes the desired standard specifica tion For details on the provided XML files refer to chapter 6 4 11 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 185 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard on page 270 Save As Standard Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Save As Standard dialog box in which the currently used SEM settings and parameters can be saved and exported into an xml file Enter the name of the file in the File name field For details on the structure and contents of the XML file refer to chap ter 6 4 10 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 179 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe on page 270 Meas Start Stop Spect
99. eect eee eenee eee e ee ette eee eee eaaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeaas 278 SENSe FREQuency subsvstem A 281 SENSe POWer SUDSYStOM rrei aanne Eaa Enan AAEE EAA ANANE AARAA 284 SENSES SWEEP subsystem eee eite egere eto tha eaae EEEE AA AANE EEKANNA 293 Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem sssssss een 299 SENSe ADJust Subsystem Ee SU D S 265 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYS Teresis LOWer sss enne 266 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPEV cccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeees 266 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation esee nnne nnne 266 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE o iesiriisininiiianniniieisdinanaiiaiia idinaan 266 SENSE ADJust FREQUENCY 14 tecndesenerscs cha euneesntenenesoteneetenceodegaese enteeneeatedeceaneaeteaerers 267 SENSeJADJ SEL Eel iretur eene NEE Dee A A E E AEEA 267 SENSe ADJust ALL This command determines the ideal frequency and level configuration for the current measurement Example ADJ ALL Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 265 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVe
100. eee rtt rented dread 141 Lpange Log TO eB ise iind EE 141 L Range Log kp ENER 142 LRange Log 10B NERO 142 L Range Log Manuel 142 L Range Linear 98 142 L Range Lin Meester 142 L y Axis Max Valit eain eiea aeeaiei per iiaii aie 143 L y Axis AA TEE 143 2 EE 143 L Default SOHN sc riter tennis terna ix rnit gine 143 L Adjust DERBI sitem etre ati oninia eU edd tad 143 L Gated Trigger ONDE sina e Iris aires teni LR cla abb don ambas rus 144 uc jJ MNT 144 E e Eo e MPO EA 145 Power vs TII EE 145 L No of beleet eege deet 145 L RF Slot Full Idee 145 iio dr dele NENNT P 145 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a Se ae ee a es es ee Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements L Reference Mean Duwr sre ind cas 145 L Reference EE irre ee Heer dee Ha edenda 146 L Set Mean to Manual 146 L Restart on NIE 146 L Restore STD Lines ttd e apu Nua ated xa idein abd rk addons 146 L ET EE 146 PUT d PL REDEEM 146 Code Domain Analyzer Starts the Code Domain Analyzer and opens the Code Domain Analyzer menu Select the desired result display via this menu For details refer to chapter 6 2 1 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer menu in BTS mode on page 66 or chapter 6 2 2 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu in MS Mode on page 83 For details on the measurements in the code domain initial con figuration and screen layout refer to chapter 6 1 Measurements and Result Displays on page 32
101. from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 315 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 323 Signal Source Opens a dialog box to select the signal source For Digital Baseband OI the source can also be configured here Input Path Signal Source Defines whether the RF Radio Frequency or the Digital IQ input path is used for measurements Digital IQ is only available if option R amp S FSV B17 R amp S Digital UO Interface is installed Note Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal which differ sig nificantly between the RF input and digital input Remote command INPut SELect on page 320 Connected Device Signal Source Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 to provide Digital IQ input The device name cannot be changed here The device name is unknown Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 315 Input Sample Rate Signal Source Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 318 Oper
102. lt relative level gt relative level of the channel referred to the total or pilot power Le ei see SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 261 dB lt timing offset gt Timing offset of the channel referred to the pilot in seconds S phase offset Phase offset referred to the pilot in rad If the evaluation of the rad timing and phase offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned All detected active channels are output first followed by the inactive or quasi active channels The channels are sorted in ascending code number order with identical code numbers the branch first followed by the Q branch The unassigned codes are dis played together with code class 4 7 9 14 Channel Table CTABle BTS Mode The command returns 12 values including 4 reserved values for maximum timing and phase offsets in the following order max time offset in s gt channel type code number for max time code class for max time max phase offset in rad channel type code number for max phase code class for max phase reserved 1 gt reserved 4 gt Table 7 2 Return values for parameter CTABle Value Description Range Unit max time offset Max timing offset value of all channels S channel type channel type indication 0 7 T
103. n 326 OUTPULTIRIG GG c NER 326 kie iczeB len 263 aeu pecu cp c Oc rp MLuc M RBR ss i Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 333 R amp S FSV K84 K85 List of Commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDItION 0 0 eeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeecaeseeecaeeeaeeaeesareeeeseseaeenneeeeeeeeteeas 300 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENIt 2 notre a re tette tet teri tren E eh EH d e 300 AER NIE Ee RE 327 TRAGesrn EDATA iicet dece tete a tp erp pee ed etd peteret d i e a anita 301 TRIGger n SEQuence BBPower HOLDOff esses ener eene ertet rnt nennen rennen 321 TRIGger n SEQuence HOLDoff TIME TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis eese nnne nnne nnn nnns 321 TRIGger n SEQuence LEVel BBPowWer eene enne eterne tnnt thea a tetra natnra nna renes 320 TRlGoerznztGEOuencelL Eve EN Temall esses eene nnne nennen nnne 322 e ele ee E Ree 322 TRIGgersn SEQuenceJSOVULEYCGO 51 itte ectest eric gebei Lee 322 SENSe ADJUSEALL acento pee ce ne et ete e ee tp ese e dta a eg rare d da 265 IGENZGe IAD Just COhNFourationHvGTeressl Oe 266 IGENZGe IADJustCOhNFouratonHvGTeress Ufer 266 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE esses nennen nennen 266 SENSe
104. negative effect on the measurement accuracy It is therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into consid eration when selecting the frequency span For channel power measurements the Adjust Settings softkey sets the frequency span as follows No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x transmission channel bandwidth measurement margin For adjacent channel power measurements the Adjust Settings softkey sets the fre quency span as a function of the number of transmission channels the transmission channel spacing the adjacent channel spacing and the bandwidth of one of adja cent channels ADJ ALT1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmission channels No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x adjacent channel spacing adjacent channel bandwidth measurement margin The measurement margin is approx 10 of the value obtained by adding the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth e Resolution bandwidth RBW To ensure both acceptable measurement speed and required selection to suppress spectral components outside the channel to be measured especially of the adjacent channels the resolution bandwidth must not be selected too small or too large As a general approach the resolution bandwidth is to be set to values between 1 and 4 of the channel bandwidth A larger resolution bandwidth can be selected if the spectrum within the
105. not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 This function is not available for 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode K85 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 267 Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings softkey Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 267 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 111 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 2 9 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Settings Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling Possible settings are e Meas Time Manual on page 112 e Meas Time Auto on page 112 Meas Time Manual Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey Auto Level on page 111 The default value is 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation on page 266 Meas Time Auto lt Settings The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value of 100 ms Upper Level Hysteresis Settings Defines an up
106. of active MAC channels MTYPe modulation type of the channel type 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16QAM 5 2BPSk PCDerror peak code domain error in dB PDATa absolute power in the DATA channel type PLENGth Length of preamble in chips PMAC absolute power in the MAC channel type POFFset phase offset in rad PPICh Pilot power in dBm MS mode only PPILot absolute power in the PILOT channel type PPReamble absolute power in the PREAMBLE channel type PRRI RRI power in dBm PTOTal total power RHO RHO value for the selected channel type slot RHOData RHO over all slots for the DATA area RHOMac RHO over all slots for the MAC area RHOPilot RHO over all slots for the pilot area RHOVerall RHO overall RHO1 RHOoverall 1 over all slots over all chips with start of averaging at the half slot limit RHO2 203 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem RHOoverall 2 over all slots over all chips with start of averaging at the quarter slot limit SFACtor spreading factor of the channel SLOT half slot number MS mode only SRATe symbol rate in ksps TFRame trigger to frame in sec TOFFset timing offset in s The Trigger to Frame value TFRame supplies a 9 if the trigger is at Free Run The Timing Phase Offset values TOFFset POFFset supply a 9 if timing and phase measurement is disabled refer to SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 or the number
107. of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either down wards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected band width and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF or Power vs Time measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 298 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 298 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote
108. offset Referred to the first active channel in rad If the rad evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned 7 9 13 Channel Table Trace MS mode The command returns 8 values for each channel in the following order channel type code class code number mapping absolute level relative level timing offset phase offset Value Description Range Unit channel type The channel type is coded with numbers as follows 0 7 0 PICH channel type 1 RRI 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE 6 DSC 7 Auxiliary Pilot lt code class gt code class of the channel specifies the spreading factor of the 2 4 channel Class 4 corresponds to spreading factor 16 symbol rate 76 8 ksps class 2 to the lowest permissible spreading factor 4 symbol rate 307 2 ksps lt code number gt code number of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 lt mapping gt Modulation type including mapping 0 I branch 12 Q branch 2 and Q branch lt absolute level gt absolute level of the channel Le 0 dBm Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 309 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit
109. offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned lt CDPRelative gt relative level of the channel referenced to total power in the 9 channel type dB lt CDPAbsolute gt absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot si dBm lt EVMRms gt Error vector magnitude rms lt EVMPeak gt Error vector magnitude peak Power vs Chip BTS Mode The command returns one value for each chip lt level value in dBm gt The number of results that are displayed is always 2048 one power level for each chip Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 306 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 9 6 7 9 7 7 9 8 7 9 9 7 9 10 7 9 11 TRACe DATA Results Power vs Halfslot MS Mode The command returns one value pair for each half slot lt half slot number gt lt level value in dB gt The number of returned value pairs corresponds to the IQ capture length Power vs Symbol The command returns one value for each symbol value in dBm gt In BTS mode the number of results depends on the number of symbols and is between 2 and 100 In MS mode the number of values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 16 64 values Spreading factor 8 128 values Spreading factor 4 256 values Composite EVM The command returns two
110. or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF or Power vs Time measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 298 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 298 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is lt 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 298 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweeping e Sweep on page 159 e FFT on page 159 not available with 5 Pole filters channel fi
111. overall measurement time depends also on the set resolution bandwidth as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the sampling rate Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples on page 230 Scaling CCDF Opens a submenu to change the scaling parameters of x and y axis Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 140 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements x Axis Ref Level Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the currently active unit dBm dByV etc The function of this softkey is identical to the Ref Level softkey in the Amplitude menu see Ref Level on page 68 For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram border For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x axis is scaled relatively to the measured mean power Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RLEVel on page 232 x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Opens the Range submenu to select a value for the level range to be covered by the statistics measurement selected Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe on page 232 Range Log 100 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253
112. represents the code number The number of codes depends on the Channel Type on page 72 Each bar in the diagram represents one code The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the power of each code By default the scaling is relative The measurement evaluates the total signal of a specific channel over a single slot Code Domain Power I 1 Clrw Start Code 0 4 Code Stop Code 63 Fig 6 1 Code Domain Power result display The standard requires an averaged code domain analysis Select CDP Average on page 81 and the R amp S FSV performs a measurement over all slots and averages the results For the Data and Preamble channels the standard assumes that in the slots preambles of different lengths do not occur Active and inactive channels are defined via Inactive Channel Threshold on page 74 The power values of the assigned and unassigned codes are displayed in different colors e Yellow assigned code e Cyan unassigned code Set the mapping with Mapping Type on page 72 The Mapping Auto function causes complex mapping to be analyzed separately for the Data channel type and mapping for the or Q branch to be analyzed separately for the other channel types In the latter case the I Q selection can be set by means of Invert Q on page 70 Another option for obtaining an overview of the CDP is to enable complex mapping The code domain power is then constantly displayed as a complex analysis on screen A for the s
113. results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 20 Symbol Constellation on page 313 6 1 3 12 EVM vs Symbol This result display shows the EVM on symbol level The x axis represents the symbols and the y axis shows the EVM in The number of symbols depends on the channel type and is in the range from 2 to 100 Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 171 for further information The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single slot You can select a specific code and slot with the Select softkey EVM vs Symbol IQ 1 Clrw Start Sym 0 8 Sym Stop Sym 95 Fig 6 12 EVM vs Symbol result display Inactive channels can be measured but the result is meaningless since these channels do not contain data Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 46 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 1 3 13 6 1 4 Measurements and Result Displays To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 21 EVM vs Symbol on page 313 Composite Constellation This result display provides information about the constellation points at chip level For each chip a constellation point is displayed in the diagram The number of chips is between 64
114. scale level automat ically if the fullscale level changes This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG COUP OFF Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 It can be defined either in dBm or Volt see Full Scale Level on page 114 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 70 711 nV to 7 071 V RST 1V Example INP DIQ RANG 1V Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Level Unit on page 114 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base un
115. selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 201 6 1 4 3 Power vs Half Slot This result display shows the power of the selected channel over all half slots Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 51 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 1 4 4 Measurements and Result Displays Power vs Chip ei Clrw Start Sym 0 zm 256 Chip Stop Sym 2047 Fig 6 16 Power vs Half Slot result display Select the channel to be analyzed via the Select softkey Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVChip see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chapter 7 9 6 Power vs Halfslot MS Mode on page 307 Power vs Symbol This result display shows the power of the selected channel and the selected half slot at each symbol time The number of symbols on the x axis is between 2 and 100 depending on the channel type Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 52 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Measurements and Result Displays Spectrum CDMA2000 BTS 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 20 00 dB
116. settings refer to Sweep List dialog box on page 130 For details on defining the limits masks see the base unit description Working with Lines in SEM The following rules apply to ranges e The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz e The individual ranges must not overlap but need not directly follow one another e The maximum number of ranges is 20 e Aminimum of three ranges is mandatory e The reference range cannot be deleted it is marked in blue color e The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency e The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth e Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency In order to change the start frequency of the first range or the stop frequency of the last range select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated 6 4 13 Symmetrical ranges You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings i e the ranges to the left and right of the center range are defined symmectrically In the Sweep List menu select the Symmetrical Setup softkey to activate symmetrical setup mode The current sweep list confi
117. special channels like F SYNC first then data channels and next by the spreading factor in ascending order Last the sorting is done by the code number also in ascending order Save New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Saves the table under its specified name in the xml format If you edit a channel table and want to keep the original channel table change the name of the edited channel table before saving it Cancel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Closes the dialog box and returns to the Channel Table Settings dialog box Changes applied to the channel table are lost Reload New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Reloads the original content of the copied channel table This softkey is available for the New Channel Table dialog box and the Edit Channel Table dialog box Delete Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel table The currently active channel table cannot be deleted Restore Default Tables Channel Table Settings Restores the predefined channel tables see chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 168 to their factory set values Existing channel tables with the same name as default channel tables are replaced by this action In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Result Demod Settings This softkey opens the Result Demodulation Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 97 R amp S FSV K8
118. switched off the command produces a query error Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Return values Result The result is returned in the form lt result gt result where result PASSED FAILED and where the first returned value denotes the lower the second denotes the upper adjacent channel Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dB CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent chan nel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the limit check for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe State This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent channel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Before this command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult Note that a complete
119. test model with 9 channels In this measurement changing some parameters one after the other should demonstrate the resulting effects values adapted to the measurement signal are changed to non adapted values described using the dialog boxes Alternatively most of the settings can also be modified by using the corresponding hardkeys as in the base unit e g the center frequency can be either set in the Frontend Settings dialog box or via the FREQ key o In the following examples adjusting the settings of the code domain measurements is Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO MS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings sof
120. the standard For details on the predefined channel tables refer to chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 168 In addition new channel tables can be created and saved to be used in measurements Channel Search Mode Channel Table Settings Defines the kind of channel table used for the measurement Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 93 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Auto The Auto Search mode scans the whole code domain including all permissible symbol rates and channel numbers for active channels The automatic search provides an overview of the channels contained in the signal If chan nels are not detected as being active change the threshold see Inactive Channel Thresh old or select the Predefined channel search type Predef Performs the code domain measurement on the basis of the active predefined channel table All channels of a channel table are assumed to be active For further details also refer to the Channel Tables field and the chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 168 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 238 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 242 Inactive Channel Threshold Channel Table Settings Defines the minimum power which a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be recognized as an active channel Chann
121. the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 322 Select Channel Settings This softkey opens the Select Channel Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 71 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a SSeS a es Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Channel Type Settings P e Pilot MAC Channel Type Preamble 1 WM oy Data Mapping Settings Mapping Type Q Complex Mapping Auto Channel Type Select Channel Settings Select one of the following channel types for the measurement e Pilot e MAC e Preamble e Data For further details on the ch
122. to incorrect measurement results which are indicated Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 105 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 314 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 315 El Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note T
123. to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal For details see also the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 232 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 143 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deeg Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Gated Trigger On Off CCDF Activates and deactivates the gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF channel The trigger source is changed to EXTERN if this function is switched on The gate ranges are defined using the Gate Ranges on page 144 softkey Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe on page 294 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 295 Gate Ranges CCDF Opens a dialog to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace For details on configuration see Defining gated triggering for APD and CCDF meas urements in the base unit description Trace 1 Comment Period Range 1 Start 1 us 1us 1 us 1 us 1us Range 1 Stop 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 us Range 1 Use Off Off Off Off Off Range 2 Start 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 us 1 pus Range 2 Stop 1us 1us 1 us 1us 1 us 1us Range 2 Use Off Off Off Off Off Off Range 3 Start 1 us lus 1 us 1
124. up to four PowerClass nodes gt lt PowerClass gt lt LinkDirection gt lt RS_SEM_ACP_File gt e The PowerClass element is structured as follows lt PowerClass Index n gt lt StartPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag true Value StartPowerValue gt lt StopPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Value StopPowerValue lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt Limit Fail Mode lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 181 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a SS Sn a ed Further Information Range Index n gt lt For contents of the Range node see table 6 14 gt lt Define up to twenty Range nodes gt lt Range gt lt PowerClass gt e The Range element is structured as follows Range Index n gt lt Name Name gt lt ChannelType gt Channel Type lt Channel Type gt lt WeightingFilter gt lt Type gt FilterType lt Type gt lt RollOffFactor gt Factor lt RollOffF actor gt lt Bandwith gt Bandwidth lt Bandwidth gt lt WeightingFilter gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Start gt RangeStart lt Start gt lt Stop gt RangeStop lt Stop gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Limit gt Start Unit Unit Value Value gt Stop Unit Unit Value Value lt Limit gt lt Limit gt Start Unit Unit Value Value gt Stop Unit Unit Value Value lt Limit gt lt RBW Bandwi
125. value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent chan nel measurement CALC LIM ACP ALT2 STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ALT2 RES Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe lt State gt This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power measure ments The commands CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe must be used in addition to specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper lower adjacent channel or for the alternate adjacent channels Suffix lt n gt lt k gt Parameters lt State gt Example Selects the measurement window irrelevant
126. values for each half slot in the following order Half Slot number gt value in 9o The number of value pairs that is displayed corresponds to the IQ capture length There fore the number of results is between 2 and 12 Composite Data EVM MS Mode The command returns the error vector magnitude for each despreaded chip of the com posite data channel The number of returned values is 1024 Composite Data Constellation MS Mode The command returns the real and imaginary parts from each despreaded chip of the composite data channel Composite Data Bitstream MS Mode The command returns the bitstream of one half slot for the composite data channel The number of returned bits depends on the modulation type of the composite data channel Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 307 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis TRACe DATA Results Modulation Type Number of returned bits Q4Q2 1536 E4E2 2304 7 9 12 Channel Table Trace BTS mode The command returns 8 values for all active channels in the following order lt channel type gt lt code class gt lt code number gt lt modulation gt lt absolute level gt lt rela tive level gt lt timing offset gt lt phase offset gt The channels are listed in the following channel type order PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA Within the channel types the channels are sorted in ascending code number order Value Description Ran
127. with CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Suffix n irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 232 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt Value gt 120dBm to 20dBm RST 20dBm Example CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 60dBm CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer Value This command defines the lower limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix n selects the screen Parameters Value 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command defines the scaling type of the y axis Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Value gt This command defines the upper limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 1E 8 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 233 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem 7 2 4 6 Other Referenced CALCulate
128. with each concentrated channel A programming example for a query for 2 channels is given in chapter 7 11 1 Retrieving Trace Results on page 327 General Results Channel Results BTS Mode The command returns 30 values for the selected channel in the following order lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt CERRor gt lt TFRame gt lt RHOPilot gt lt RHO1 gt lt RHO2 gt lt PPILot gt lt PMAC gt lt PDATa gt lt PPReamble gt lt MACCuracy gt lt DMTYpe gt lt MAC Tive gt lt DACTive gt lt PLENGth gt lt RHO gt lt PCDerror gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt IQOFfset gt Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 303 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis TRACe DATA Results lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFFset gt lt CDPRelative gt CDPab solute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt lt MTYPe gt Value Description Range Unit lt FERRor gt Frequency error Hz lt FERPpm gt Frequency error ppm lt CERRor gt Chip rate error ppm lt TFRame gt Trigger to frame Note The Trigger to Frame value TFRame supplies a 9 if the trigger is at FREE RUN The Timing Phase Offset values TOFFset POFFset supply a 9 if timing and phase measurement is dis abled refer to CDP TPM or the number of active channels is higher than 50 lt RHOPilot gt RHO over all slots for the pilo
129. 0766 02 08 294 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff lt DelayTime gt This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the continu ation of the sweep Note Using gate mode level see SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE on page 297 and an IFP trigger see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 322 the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements Parameters lt DelayTime gt 0sto30s RST 0s Example SWE EGAT HOLD 100us SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth lt Timelnterval gt This command defines a gate length Parameters Timelnterval 125 ns to 30 s RST 400us Example SWE EGAT LENG 10ms SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity lt Polarity gt This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level triggered signal Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce Source This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is opened as soon as a signal at 20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth 10 MHz Parameters Source EXTernal IFPower VIDeo RF
130. 16 QAM have complex values Always 0 reserved Always 0 reserved 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily Power value in dB CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 5 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 Defines a table with the following channels PICH 0 64 and data channel with RC4 Walsh code 3 32 EVDO BTS CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt lt Activity gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Status gt lt Reserved2 gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to EVDO MS mode K85 only For BTS mode see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 239 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to New Copy Edit on page 74 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 240 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Parameters lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt lt Activity gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Status gt lt Reserved2 gt Example Mode Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CONFigure Subsystem The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0
131. 294 295 Gate Length remote control 295 Gate Mode Lvl Edge remote control 297 Gate Ranges nete tenerse ges 144 Gate Ranges remote control 297 Grid Abs Rel otn nre tren 156 Grid Abs Rel remote control s 251 IF Output IF Video remote control 326 Input 50 W 75 W remote control 320 Insert after Range essen 133 Insert after Range remote control 274 Insert before Range sssssssssseeeee 133 Insert before Range remote control 274 Last Spalt tienen eene 151 Limit Chk On Off remote control 223 Link Mrk1 and Delta1 remote control 213 List Evaluation esses 134 List Evaluation On Off sess 135 Load Standard ine meets 138 Manual 149 Manual remote control ssssesesess 282 O Te UE 135 Marker 1 remote control 216 Marker 1 to 4 remote control 216 217 Marker 2 remote control 216 Marker 3 remote control 216 Marker 4 remote control 216 Marker Norm Delta remote control Marker Table Off On Aut remote control Marker to Trace remote control Max Hold rte et oto ten reiten Meas K84 e Meas Start Stop nennen Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08
132. 4 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Result Demodulation Settings amp Common Settings Revision SubType 0 1 SubType 2 SubType 3 Code Order Hadamard Bit Reverse Normalize On e otf Time Phase Est On e Off Operation Mode Traffic Access Despread On e Off Power Settings CDP Average On e otf Code Power Absolute 6 Relative Total Pilot Power Reference Close Subtype Result Demod Settings Specifies the characteristics of the signal you want to analyze In subtype 2 the number of active users increases That means that the spreading factor number of orthogonal codes doubles for channel types MAC and PREAMBLE The amount of returned trace data in the MAC and PREAMBLE channels is different for subtype 0 1 and 2 depending on the channel type and selected evaluation see chap ter 6 4 3 Channel Type Characteristics on page 172 The R amp S FSV detects all the channels on a per slot basis Therefore the R amp S FSV recognizes changes in the channel configuration and modulation over the recorded slots In subtype 2 the following modulation types are added within some of the MAC channels ON OFF keying ACK on the branch OOKA 1 ON OFF keying ACK on the Q branch OOKA Q ON OFF keying NACK on the branch OOKN I and the ON OFF keying NACK on the Q branch OOKN Q If the 2
133. 4 Measure Channel Table G4 76 96 measurement ied q H 119 CODE eerte 140 Code Domain Analyzer aw 119 Crest Factor 140 Occupied Bandwidth 139 Ower suergt egeugen zue 119 Power vs Time we 145 Spectrum Emission Mask 129 measurement examples sto MEE ER Measurement menu menu multi carrier filter CL A 80 KOS ise ceteitn iib Hs eee sena tdeo EE 92 N Negative Peak detector sse 173 noise COITeCtiOn es Source external e No of HalfSlots sssssssss sese Normalization BA orb estet NE LUE LEES 79 K84 remote command seen 260 GTC 99 O occupied bandwidth s essen 139 offset e ue etre roii enens 68 86 103 149 reference level Offset 69 86 105 155 Dra 71 89 109 Online help ee lie KE 8 Options lI M eg 105 154 318 RF Preamplifier B22 69 87 105 154 Overwrite mode E 109 174 P Peak Code Domain Error KBA eege ege eseu prio e AC 43 312 Mn d ege edd deiere 60 Peak List K84 remote Commande 301 Ph Noise Auto Peak Search remote Control och tia eer e gue 212 Pilot Channel 72 PN Offset KBA 79 K84 remote Commande 261 polarity external trigger ccc
134. 47 Center remote Control esses 282 CF Stepsize 147 Clear Wiite inre neret rro 109 174 Close Sweep List AA 133 Continue Single Sweep 107 163 Continuous Sweep eeeeeeeeeeieeeserrrseserenees 107 163 Continuous Sweep remote control 324 Cont Meas remote control 924 Decim Sep remote control sssss 323 DIGI GONE ER EL Atten remote control Hs EL Atten Mode Auto Man remote control 318 319 El Atten On Off ence enn 106 154 ee 115 dci 159 165 FFT Filter Mode Frequency Offset remote control 283 Frontend Settings A 68 85 Full Spar iicet eerte zx191 IF Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 321 IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis remote control 321 Input AC DC esses 107 113 156 166 Input AC DC remote control 315 IQ Capture Settings 69 87 Marker 1 to 4 remote control sss 217 Marker to Trace remote control 234 Max Hold E Mech Atten Auto sess 106 154 Mech Atten Auto remote control 315 Mech Atten Manual D Mech Atten Manual remote control 314 Miti Hold 2 onte tnit Preamp On Off ep Preamp On Off remote control
135. 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS MS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and activate the 1xEV DO MS Analysis option 3 Start the Power measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Power softkey 4 Setthe center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 833 49 MHz 5 Set the reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm On the screen the spectrum of the signal and the corresponding power levels within the 1 2288 MHz channel bandwidth are displayed In the table below the diagram the numeric values of the channel bandwidth of the TX Channel and power level of the ana lyzed signal are listed Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 20 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 4 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask To detect spurious emissions such as harmonics or intermodulation products the R amp S FSV offers a spectrum emission mask measurement The measurement compares the power against the spectrum emission mask in the range from 4 MHz to 4 MHz around the carrier The exact measurement settings like the filter that is used depend on the Band Class parameter For a list of supported bandclasses refer to the Bandclass on page 120 softkey in the Spectrum Emission Mask menu Test setup e Connect the
136. 5 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Information 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables Predefined channel tables offer access to a quick configuration for the channel search The 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option provides the following set of channel tables com pliant with the 1xEV DO specification DOQPSK Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type QPSK in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types DO8PSK Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type 8 PSK in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types DO16QAM Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type 16 QAM in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types DO_IDLE Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC known as IDLE slot since it does not contain any active channels in the DATA channel type PICH MS mode only Channel table with the pilot channel as it exists in Access mode at least during the first slot 16 PICHRRI MS mode only Channel table with pilot channel and RRI with the name PICHRRI The channels are active on the same code but at different times If the RRI and the PICH are active it is assumed that for the first 256 chips 1 4 of the half slot 1 8 of the entire slot only the RRI and then the PICH is active in this half slot If only the PICH is act
137. 6 1 4 2 6 1 4 3 6 1 4 4 6 1 4 5 6 1 4 6 6 1 4 7 6 1 4 8 6 1 4 9 6 1 4 10 6 1 4 11 6 1 4 12 6 1 4 13 6 1 4 14 6 1 4 15 6 1 4 1 Measurements and Result Displays RF measurement results are described in chapter 6 1 5 RF Measurement Results on page 62 Code Domain POWer ier io fend ees n e deed Ra Hee N REPRE euo cu ERR dE Ae 48 RESU SUMPAY mE DE 49 Power vs Half e 51 Power vs Symbol EE 52 Composite EVM RMG 53 Channel Table m ie ege t cca tta andes neces lA Eo edke sias 54 Composite Data EVM iecit eene dEr EES aenean pax e ne Ya FERREA e aer E Rudd aa 55 Composite Data Constellaton nenne 56 Composite Data Bitsiream enne nennen 57 leie Beete EE 57 EVM VS SYMDOM TEEN 58 Composite Constellation A 59 Channel BItslrearm aan oe EREECHEN SE eege 59 Peak Code Domain EFIfOr iioii n aided eie e a HERR EES 60 Code Domai e 61 Code Domain Power This result display determines the power of all codes of a specific channel and plots it in a diagram The x axis represents the code number The number of codes depends on the Select Channel Settings on page 71 Each bar in the diagram represents one code The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the power of each code By default the scaling is relative The measurement evaluates the total signal of a specific channel over a single slot Code Domain Power I 1 Clrw Start Code 0 4 Code Stop Code 63 Fig 6 14 Code Domain P
138. 7 I Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 332 R amp S FSV K84 K85 List of Commands CONFioure CDbowert BTGIREGL ot 247 CONFigu re CDPower BTS SUB Ke 247 RI Een EA Le le 323 REGER 248 DiSblavfWiNDow nzlGLZE enne nnne nt rens enn rns irn nrts set nns siat ness innen inn rnt siena 249 DISPlayEWINBowsn SSEL GCt E 249 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe DlSblavf WiNDow nzTR ACectGMODE eterne eere tnnr rnnt nnns ener nre nnns sert eranen enea 250 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectV GbPACng ener eene nennen nnne n nennt nena 253 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectGvTGCAL el 250 DlSblavf WiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelAlTO ener eene nnne nnne 251 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum esses nnne enn 254 DlSblavf WiNDow nzTR ACect Wl SCAL etMiNimum tenerent nnne 254 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectGvTGCALetMODE nennen enhn nennt nena 251 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision sess 252 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel DlSblavf WiN Dow nzTR ACectvlSCALelbRlEvelOttz et enne 252 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition essere 253 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectGVTGCALelRVAl ue nennen 253 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACecGlGTATel nennen nennen nennen sinet rens n nennen sena 250 FORMat DEXPoit DSEPatator its case redet eene i de vue debeo dE EE AA 323 INITlate nz CONMeas tatit tatkina AtEEEAANEEEANEEEEANEANNNEEAANSEEEAEEEEESEEEENAEEEEEEEEENAN EE
139. 84 K85 ET 7 2 3 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 Parameters lt MeasType gt Example Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement with a single carrier signal CPOWer Channel power measurement with a single carrier signal equiv alent to adjacent channel power measurement with NO OF ADJ CHAN 0 MCACpower Channel adjacent channel power measurement with several car rier signals OBANdwidth OBWidth Measurement of occupied bandwidth CN Measurement of carrier to noise ratio CNO Measurement of carrier to noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz band width CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP Switches on adjacent channel power measurement CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM lt State gt If marker zoom is activated the number of channels displayed on the screen in code domain power and code domain error power result diagram is reduced to 64 The currently selected marker defines the center of the displayed range Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Parameters lt State gt Example Mode irrelevant 1 4 marker number ON OFF RST OFF CALC MARK FUNC ZOOM ON WCDMA CALCulate LIMit PVTime Subsystem The CALCulate LIMit PVTime subsystem defines the limit check for power vs time mea surement 208 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO An
140. A 2 4 CC 2 Q 10 0 dB INST SEL MDO Activate 1xEV DO MS implicitly CDP relative is displayed on Screen A and Result Summary is active on Screen B Mapping is set to I INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep CDP MAPP Q Select Q branch CDP ORD HAD Set order to Hadamard INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative Hadamard Q te 0 53 37 3 4 1 52 3 0 Code 0 is quasi inactive as PICH is set to I 4 2 10 1 1 4 3 54 6 0 The DATA channel is distributed between 4 4 51 2 0 4 5 55 1 0 the active codes 2 16 6 16 10 16 14 16 4 6 16 4 1 4 7 51 3 0 each with one quarter of the power i e 4 8 52 4 0 4 9 55 5 0 10 dB 6 dB 16 dB 4 10 15 8 1 4 11 54 3 0 4 12 51 8 0 4 13 57 6 0 4 14 15 9 1 4 15 52 570 LM Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 327 Programming Examples CDP ORD BITR Set order to BitReverse TRAC TRACEL Read out CDP relative BitReverse Q Sorting is changed in accordance with BitReverse 4 0 53 3 3 4 8 52 4 0 PICH is quasi inactive 4 4 51 2 0 4 12 51 8 0 2p 247402071 Channel 2 4 is now consolidated and 4 1 52 3 0 4 8 55 5 0 displayed with accumulated power 4 5 55 1 0 4 13 57 6 0 4 35 54 6 0 4 11 54 3 0 4 7 51 3 0 4 15 52 5 0 CDP OVER ON Activate Overview mode CDP relative on Screen A I branch CDP relative on Screen B Q bra
141. ATE 28 hada dace tant eoa 250 BISPlayEWINBowen TRAGCest Y SCAL6 iioii rct tendat nto dee 250 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelAUlTO nennen 251 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE essere nnne 251 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVISION 0 cceceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaneees 252 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVEl ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeees 252 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet e ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 252 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSItION eee eeceeeee eee ee eee eaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeees 253 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelRVAl ue enne 253 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACING 0 2 ccecee cece eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaaneees 253 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum eese nennen 254 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum eeeeeeeeee nennen 254 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Marker table is displayed OFF Marker table is not displayed AUTO Marker table is only displayed if 2 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example To activate the table display DISP MTAB ON To query the current state of the marker table display DISP MTAB Operating Manual 1173 0766
142. AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 298 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 298 Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R amp S FSV specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 283 Last Span Sets the span to the previous value With this function e g a fast change between over view measurement and detailed measurement is possible Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for RF Measurements The following table shows all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu for RF meas urements except for Power vs Time measurements The softkeys in the Amplitude menu for CDA and Power vs Time measurements are described in chapter 6 2 4 Soft keys of the Amplitude Menu for CDA Measurements on page 104 oim ns eiaasnes 151 tipo EE 152 L Range Log EE NERONE OT 152 L Range Log BO dB oe poder parenti etr a E Raph pM pd pete dba 152 Me Sa Log QU HB uctor aa ttes idt ten uibus 152 L Range Egeter 153 Range Log 1 dB hie per rete tc HR E esa A 153 L Range Loo Monbal 1 esepi a cxi erdt aber 153 d 00 IRL dp PRI 153 B o DRDAT D m 153 Preamp OWO M 154 RF Atten Manual Mech At Mari gl trei tetti caer tt hn cte entrances 154 RF Atten Aut MecMm AMAUO EE 154 p ere E 154 El Atten Mode Auto Man
143. AbBleCATalog nennen ennennren neret nenne nentes 238 CONFioure CDbowert BTGlCTAble COMMent ener nenne nennen nentn nnn nt nnne CONFioure CDPowert BTGICTAbBleCOPy neret nreennrse tret rese nnse terrens nnne CONFioure CDbowert BTGICTAble DATA CONFioure CDPowert BTGICTABle DATA CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete CONFioure CDPowert BTGICTARBIeNAME nennen nen nset eret rns dne sen rete nnne CONFioure CDbowert BTGiCTAblebRtztore A CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELG Ct csccccssseseseerseccnsnseseseenseceasensussecceoneasaoeapeensensenaencensenenneeeas CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle S TATe esee nennen nnne nnne CONFioure CDbowert B TGlMCAbnterTGSTATel enne rennen inneren CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FlLTer STATe CONFioure CDbowert BTGlMCAbnter El TerCOFReoguency enne tnnt nnn 243 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARr ier FILTer ROFF eese neret neren neret 243 CONFioure CDbowert BTGlMCAbrter EI TerTWbE meten 244 CONFioure CDPowert BT GIMCAbrter MAL Go 244 CONFioure CDbowert BTGlMEAGurement nennen retenir nnn nnnr seen nnns nnn en nnne CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart eese enne nennen nnne nennen 245 CONFioure CDPowert BTGIPpVTme LISTREGu ener 246 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST STATe sese nnnm 246 CONFigure GDPower B TS FSEVISIOTD eerte nter retten nnb pter knee E ena nera Rn REO peu ud 24
144. Activates automatic sweep time SENSe SWEep TYPE Type This command selects the sweep type Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 298 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN 7 6 2 7 SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Type gt SWE Selects analog frequency sweeps AUTO Automatically selects the sweep type FFT or analog frequency sweep FFT Selects FFT sweeps RST AUTO Example SWE TYPE FFT Selects FFT sweeps Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNt lt NoMeasurements gt This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average value Note that continuous averaging is performed after the indicated number has been reached in continuous sweep mode In single sweep mode the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of meas urements Sweeps is reached Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode This command has the same effect as the SENSe lt source gt SWEep COUNt com mand In both cases the number of measurements is defined whether the average cal culation is active or not The number of measurements applies to all traces in the window Suffix n Selects the measurement window Parameters lt NoMeasurements gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example SWE CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode AVER COUN 16 Sets the number of mea
145. Analysis DEE Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to configure the channel power and adjacent channel power mea surement independently of the predefined standards for details see also chapter 6 4 14 Predefined CP ACLR Standards on page 190 and chapter 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 191 of TX Chan CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of carrier signals to be taken into account in channel and adjacent channel power measurements Values from 1 to 18 are allowed Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt on page 292 of Adj Chan CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of adjacent channels to be considered in the adjacent channel power measurement Values from 0 to 12 are allowed The following measurements are performed depending on the number of the channels 0 Only the channel powers are measured 1 The channel powers and the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel are measured 2 The channel powers the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 are measured 3 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel the power of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 and of the next but one higher and lower adjacent chan
146. Aone 14 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels 15 kHz CFILter 16 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA 20 kHz CFILter 21 kHz CFILter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 25 kHz CFILter 30 kHz CFILter CDPD CDMAone 50 kHz CFILter 100 kHz CFILter 150 kHz CFILter FM Radio 192 kHz CFILter PHS 200 kHz CFILter 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFiLter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA 1 MHz CFILter CDMAone aeu pu uL cc c c Jr L LrRRB B II Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 177 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Information 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 1 228 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1 28 MHz a 0 22 RRC 1 5 MHz CFILter DAB 2MHz CFILter 3 MHz CFILter 3 75 MHz CFILter 3 84 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA 3GPP 4 096 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA NTT DOCoMo 5 MHz CFILter 20 MHz CFILter 28 MHz CFILter 40 MHz CFILter The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semicolon File contents header and data section Descrip
147. Box Serial Number 100064 Port IQ IN Max Digital Output Transfer Rate 110 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Done Close Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 114 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EENS Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements For details see Interface Status Information in Instrument Functions R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface Option R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 315 EXIQ Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R amp S EX IQ BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly Note The EX IQ Box functionality is not supported for R amp S FSV models 1321 3008Kxx If the optional R amp S DiglConf software is installed the submenu consists only of one key to access the software Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the R amp S Digital UO Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 10 or higher is required For typical applications of the R amp S EX IQ BOX see also the description of the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the base unit manual For details on configuration see the R amp SGEx UO Box External Signal Interface Module Manual For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital
148. CALC LIM PVT RVA Query reference value for limit lines The value should be set to mean power value Mode EVDO CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RESTore This command restores the standard limit lines for the power versus time measurement All changes made to the standard limit lines are lost and the state of these limit lines as they left the factory is restored Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Example CALC LIM PVT REST Reset the PVT limit lines to their default setting Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 209 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 2 4 7 2 4 1 7 2 4 2 7 2 4 3 7 2 4 4 7 2 4 5 7 2 4 6 7 2 4 1 CALCulate Subsystem Mode EVDO CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RVALue lt RefLevel gt This command sets the reference level in dBm for calculating the limit lines Precondition is that the automatic mode of power calculation is switched off via the commands CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 209 ONCE or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 209 MAN Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt RefLevel gt Range 200 to 200 RST 20dBm Default unit dBm Example CALC LIM PVT REF MAN Manual reference value for limit lines CALC LIM PVTime RVA 33 5 Set manual reference value to 33 5 Mode EVDO Othe
149. CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt Modulation lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt Status lt CDPRelative gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to EVDO BTS mode K84 only For MS mode see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 240 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to New Copy Edit on page 74 Parameters lt ChannelType gt The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE with 64 chip length 3 PREAMBLE with 128 chip length 4 PREAMBLE with 256 chip length 5 PREAMBLE with 512 chip length 6 PREAMBLE with 1024 chip length 7 DATA Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 239 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Modulation gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt lt Status gt lt CDPRelative gt Example Mode CONFigure Subsystem Depending on channel type the following values are allowed PILOT 5 MAC 6 PREAMBLE 5 DATA 4 spreading factor 2 de class 0 spreading factor 1 Modulation type including mapping 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM Modulation types QPSK 8 PSK
150. CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 2 for deleting CONF CDP CTAB DEL Deletes channel table CTAB 2 Usage Event Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME lt ChannelTable gt This command selects a channel table for editing or creating To select a command for analysis use the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters ChanTableName string name of the channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME MEN TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore This command restores the predefined channel tables to their factory set values In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Example CONF CDP CTAB REST Restores the channel table Usage Event Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect lt ChannelTable gt This command selects a predefined channel table Parameters lt ChanTableName gt string name of the channel table RST RECENT Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe State This command activates or deactivates the multi carrier mode Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 242 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN CONFigure Subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Act
151. Code Domain Analysis Results BTS Mode The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result display configurations for base station measurements in the code domain 6 1 3 1 Code Domain POWGOL 1 n tado ead oc t a bda hdd eo Ela Add 35 6 1 22 General Results ard acte rt coc ea occ He e ace ec Lr e rn ded 36 6 1 3 3 Channel Results in ttt cce Ehe cette rh ec v bea Lov SEE Ade v Ee tdg 38 0 134 Powet vs e ne E 39 6 1 3 5 Power vs Symbol nicponia ecc de Erde e en cae ER Let ue be ded d 40 6 1 3 0 Composite EW egenen eren kee tete db a i Ra a ERR CEN EAR BAUER 40 6 1 3 7 Channel Table nnt Lo cte ac ce cc ree epa Hoc d due e Lc te gp dea ue 41 6 1 3 8 Channel Bitstream itr reno en oce edad e ee epa s rco e Ee A d edd due 43 6 139 Peak Code Domain EITOF t ir tern dac rep ea cac e a occi e en occ rena ded eus 43 6 1 3 10 Code Domain Error irc reto ee reta ceri a dee eb dc Ep ced ede 44 6 1 3 11 Symbol Constellation rr dct rci e reb ccc ede ena cech cedet 45 6 1 3 12 EVM VS SymbOl 2 itia descri ec a bed e dass ba dr e rd e did ue 46 6 1 3 19 Composite Constellation ttt tete tdt a de oen Lec x en 47 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 34 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Dee 6 1 3 1 Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Power This result display determines the power of all codes of a specific channel and plots it in a diagram The x axis
152. DO Analysis ee eS SS ee Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt Separator gt POINt COMMA RST factory setting is POINt RST does not affect set ting Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using max hold or averaging functions In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix n irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous State This command determines whether the trigger system
153. E Measurements and Result Displays Label Description Half Slot Number of analyzed half slot and total number of half slots Code Power Relative or absolute power values Channel Type BTS mode only Channel type of the selected channel Possible values are Pilot Mac Data and Preamble Overview of all measurement settings You can easily display an overview of all measurement settings using the Settings Over view softkey In addition to the information in the diagram header each screen title contains diagram specific trace information Screen focus One of the screens has a blue frame indicating the focus The screen focus can be changed just like in the base system The settings for trace statistics and markers can only be changed for the focussed screen Furthermore the focussed screen can be set to full screen for details see the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Configuring the Display 1 Select the Display Config softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer menu 2 Select the tab for the screen you want to configure A D 3 Select the Screen X active option to display the selected screen Tip SCPI command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe on page 249 4 Select the required result diagram to be displayed in the selected screen Tip SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 199 5 Press Close To select a predefined display configuration You can retrieve previously st
154. E 130 L Filter Type tnnt nis 131 ic EE 131 Eo e E dentaatadansdiadnexd 131 L Sweep Time Mode 131 L Sweep TITIG c ita theta Ra ia at das gage 131 2 40 EE 131 L RF Att Mode 131 L SE Attenuator sesenta tno nikih 131 I d MNT RE 131 L Transd E 132 Mile b ER 132 L Abs Limit Stat 132 L Abs Limit SOP aieia aiaiai RR 132 3 im pt EE 132 L Rel Limit Stop nnns 133 L Glose Sweep EE 133 L insert before Range ec ncnnonenniiserdan adana 133 L insert after E 133 L Delete Pange rrt ot oi eren E e obese duae 133 L SAFI EE 133 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements L Edit Reference Range 134 5 EE 134 L List Evaluation OndOg essent tenentes 135 b PMU Diss E E EE EE gegter 135 EE 135 L Save Evaluation Let 135 L ASCII File Export nnns 135 LOS E DOR asiste eene e ts 136 L Edit Reference Range 136 L Edit Power Classes 2 c scsccocsccscssececssssseecesesacsccecescecescceeocenesecseaceneseesseacens 137 L Used Power Classes 137 bb Eeer 137 Du 0 od E 138 L Add REMOVE urina e aaa aa rang atn a doe 138 To O E e 138 GN EE 138 L Save As Stari EE 138 L Meas Sil EE 138 L Restore E ETC 139 Occupied Bandwidth M TT 139 L Power Bandwidth span gt OD 139 L Channel Bandwidth span gt 01 139 L Adjust Ref Lvl Span gt EE 139 GE 140 ir PE 140 L Res BW T 140 L E 140 GT EE 140 LANSERE 15 EE 141 Mo s RI MR UM 141 L Range Log 100 dp 141 Lange Log BO eB
155. EOuencv SPAN SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL Z iron hice A terrere tee pue aedes ETE ER ER EVER ER COE E EEEEgdeE EE SENSe EREQu ncy S TARL ice Ee Aneel e rn settee div caa ao E ted dg SENSe EREQUenCcy S TOP 5 cte ge dari rag Dec pee Yd ed dea bed usto aiid needed SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel essen enn 285 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate channel esee 285 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel eene 285 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel sese rennen 286 nae puc cp Ec c C MMdFFF See Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 335 R amp S FSV K84 K85 List of Commands SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel sese 286 IGENGe POWer ACHannel Eil TerAl Pia CHANnel channelz ener enne 286 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel sessi 287 IGENGe POWerACHannel ti TertGTATelAl Temate channelz nne 287 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel channels essen 287 SENSe POWer ACHantel MODE ri rettet tenete sure ep Ye arare ta pedo Hed TES EER DARREN E SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME AL Termate channelz sss eene enne nennen 288 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel channels
156. ET Further Information 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables Creating a channel table 1 Select the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 2 Select the Channel Table Settings softkey The Channel Table Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Select the Predef channel search mode and set a threshold for inactive channels 4 Press the Add Channel softkey to create a new channel table The New Channel Table dialog box is displayed The new channel table contains no data at all 5 Enter a name for the new channel table e g Test Table in the corresponding field The name you enter in this field is also the name of the table channel file 6 Enter a description for your new channel table e g Channel table created for test purposes in the Description field 7 Build your channel table by adding the channels with the configuration you need or Measure the current signal by pressing the Meas softkey The R amp S FSV automatically adds the channels of the current signal to the channel table Refer to New Copy Edit on page 74 for a description of all parameters relating to a channel 8 Save your table by pressing the Save softkey All data is lost if you just close the dialog box The list of available channel tables in the Channel Table Settings dialog box now contains the Test Table Editing a channel table 1 Select the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 2 Select the Channel Table Settings softkey 3 Select your rece
157. EV 0 Revision 0 signal is analyzed Mode EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLot Slot This command defines the expected signal FULL slot or IDLE slot Accordingly the limit lines and the borders for calculating the mean power are set The lower and upper limit line are called DOPVTFL DOPVTFU for FULL and DOPVTIL DOPVTIU for IDLE mode It is possible to change these lines with the standard limit line editor Parameters lt Slot gt FULL IDLE RST FULL Example CONF CDP RFSL FULL Use limit line for FULL slot and connect FULL slot signal Mode EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType lt Subtype gt Selects the subtype of the standard to be used for the measurements Parameters lt Subtype gt 0 112 3 0 1 subtype 0 1 2 subtype 2 3 subtype 3 RST 0 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 247 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 4 DISPlay Subsystem Example CONF CDP SUBT 3 Subtype 3 signal is analyzed Mode EVDO DISPlay Subsystem The DISPLay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic information as well as of measurement data on the display BUS Play EE 248 DISPlayEWINDOWsn gt SIZE eoii An stoic asus seannnd aa a a aanade aa A aiaa 249 DISPlayWINDowsn gt SSEL Ct EE 249 ei ei WINDOW En KN NEE 249 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE cccecec cece rsrsr ee ceeeee te teeeeeeeeeeeeeesanaeeaeaeaaaaneneeeees 250 DISPlay WiINDowsn TRACE lt te ST
158. EV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON Results output channel power density in dBm Hz OFF Results output channel power is displayed in dBm RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PHZ ON Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth For details on a complete measurement example refer to CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 205 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect lt MeasType gt This command selects and switches on the specified power measurement type in the window specified by the suffix n The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem Note If CPOWer is selected the number of adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs is set to 0 If ACPower is selected the number of adjacent chan nels is set to 1 unless adjacent channel power measurement is switched on already The channel adjacent channel power measurement is performed for the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To select another trace for the measurement marker 1 is to be positioned on the desired trace by means of CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 207 R amp S FSV K
159. Measurements Filter Type Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the filter type for this range For details on filters see also chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 176 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE on page 271 RBW lt Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the RBW value for this range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution on page 270 VBW Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the VBW value for this range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 271 Sweep Time Mode lt Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO on page 277 Sweep Time Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the sweep time value for the range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME on page 276 Ref Level Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the reference level for the range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range RLEVel on page 276 RF Att Mode Swe
160. Measurements RBW VBW Pulse 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth 10 x resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth 10 MHz max VBW This coupling ratio is recommended whenever the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured correctly The IF filter is exclusively responsible for pulse shaping No addi tional evaluation is performed by the video filter This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 281 RBW VBW Noise 10 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth 10 At this coupling ratio noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain For noise signals the average value is displayed This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 281 RBW VBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio The resolution bandwidth video bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 0 001 to 1000 This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 281 Span RBW Auto 100 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling
161. Mit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MAXimum essent 227 CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MlNimum esses eene 227 CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class EXCLusive eene 225 CAL Culate cnzLlMitck EGbechumbRtEGTore 227 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum VALue 228 CAL Culatesn gt LIMitsk gt TEE 223 CAL Culate nzLlMitck PVimeh tterence eene nnnr senten nennt rsen nnns inna 209 CAL Culate cnzLlMitzksPViimehbtz tore ener nennen ense nnns nennen 209 CAL Culate nzLlMitckz PV mebRvVAl ue eee ennt n nnnm nent nnns edt renns en nnns sena 210 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESUIt essssseeneeeenee 201 I Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 331 R amp S FSV K84 K85 List of Commands CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer sees eneen rennen nnrne neret nnsnnneis 204 CAL Culate nzM Abker zmz FUNCionPICH 204 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer MODE eesssssseeeeeeeeeeee enne nennen nennt 205 CALOCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESUlt PHZ essen 206 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESUIt eese nennen 205 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect sessi 207 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ZOOM sess nnreenren neret neste rrr rtr sitne 208 CALC
162. Multicarrier Settings The application has two synchronization stages the frame synchronization detection of the first chip of the frame and the rough frequency phase synchronization For the frame synchronization different methods are implemented Two methods use the known sequence of a pilot channel Pilot or Auxiliary Pilot a third does not require a pilot chan nel The frequency phase synchronization always requires a pilot channel Pilot or Aux iliary Pilot Synchronization is usually only successful if both frame and frequency phase synchronization were performed correctly Auto The following modes are tried sequentially until synchronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchroni zation is reported If the result of the correlation methods sync on Pilot and Auxiliary Pilot becomes increasingly worse due to bad power conditions the non data aided synchronization works optimally and synchronization should be successful Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 90 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deeg Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Pilot For frame synchronization this method uses the correlation character istic of the known pilot channel i e pilot channel sequence spreading code including scrambling sequence The correlation must be calcu lated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 in or
163. NES EEE Enant 324 Je TREE PR CONTINUOUS EE 324 INI Tiatesns ESPOCIUUI EEN INITiate lt n gt IMMediate INPut ATTentuatiOor tiones De regere Doer eae eee etate codd uiuo r e eed INbPutATTenuatton AUTO 315 INPUEC OW PIR Gtx ioi erret rrr ee A tices Ss eren Ere etr fa ale th devs REPE eH E OR EF FOTO QR IER ERES 315 INPUE DIO CD EV ICG P NAA 315 INPut DIQ RANGO AU TQ rient ee derer a ies cca dea ite dana hae ee t per er Dp eects 316 INPutDlORANGe COUpilmg ener etre ennt etn rne rn enr sd n nnne n rn nnns inns nnns 317 INPut DIQ RANGeL UPPar rero Ave egest ce ecc eor e EENS nas 317 INPut DIG RANGe UPPer UNIT rne rae ornare Pa Een toa ran enean aa x nare Rea eae ke dada n 317 INPut DIQ SRATe INPutDIQ SRA HAUT 318 INBUEERT T iei an rome pr teer ib er rm menn EIE 318 Jal i IHESU pee eet Aine Se At et i AG ca ee seed 319 INPUDEAT TS HR RRE 319 INPULIGAIN S TAT 6 ege eatae eaae a a aniria opri PA Aaea Eed Ed eee 319 hdundicue wee cc 320 INPUt SE Re seas A 320 INS TrumentiNSELO Cte E HER RE 255 INSTrument SELect MMEMory STORG d NI M 325 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACE get seinen tI EE A P EE EE nai 326 OUTPUtlFESOQURGCE mr
164. NSe Subsystem Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO Automatically determines the measurement length MANual Manual definition of the measurement length RST AUTO Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR MODE MAN Specifies manual definition of the measurement duration ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Specifies the duration manually SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command defines the center frequency automatically by determining the highest level in the frequency span Example ADJ FREQ SENSe ADJust LEVel This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for the current measure ment You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is adjusted see SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer and SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Example ADJ LEV SENSe ESPectrum Subsystem The SENSe ESPectrum subsystem contains the remote commands to configure Spec trum Emission Mask SEM measurements SENSE TESPeettumiBWID oi reete i toa etu ENEE SEA 268 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe cessere nnne 268 SENSe JESPectr m FlL Ter RROEFALPEO aeuo ccc d etie ect EENS 269 SENSe JESPectramHighSPSBgd EE 269 IGENGeJEGbechum DRE Ge GT ANdard nennen enne 270 SENSe J ESPectmnm PRESeURES TOG enee EES EENG 270 SENSeJESPecthum PRES UST ORG iei irre EH een a RR DR EL REPRE aes 270 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zangez BANDwid RE SGolutton nen
165. O Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Sort New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Sorts the table according to the following rules First off active channels are separated from inactive channels Within these categories sorting is then done first by the channel type special channels like F SYNC first then data channels and next by the spreading factor in ascending order Last the sorting is done by the code number also in ascending order Save New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Saves the table under its specified name in the xml format If you edit a channel table and want to keep the original channel table change the name of the edited channel table before saving it Cancel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Closes the dialog box and returns to the Channel Table Settings dialog box Changes applied to the channel table are lost Reload New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Reloads the original content of the copied channel table This softkey is available for the New Channel Table dialog box and the Edit Channel Table dialog box Delete Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel table The currently active channel table cannot be deleted Restore Default Tables Channel Table Settings Restores the predefined channel tables see chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 168 to their factory set values Existing channel tables with the same name as d
166. Parameters lt RefPointLevel gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 211 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis b al CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed STATe State This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off Marker 1 is activated previously and a peak search is performed if necessary If marker 1 is activated its position becomes the reference point for the measurement The refer ence point can then be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X commands and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y independently of the position of marker 1 and of a trace It applies to all delta markers as long as the function is active Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALC
167. Parameters lt FileName gt Example ESP PRES STOR WCDMAN3GPPNDLNPowerClass 31 39 xml Stores the settins in the PowerClass 31 39 xml file in the C R_S instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP DL directory SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution Value This command sets the RBW value for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 30 0 kHz Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 270 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis a a U M SENSe Subsystem Example ESP RANG2 BAND RES 5000 Sets the RBW for range 2 to 5 kHz SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo Value This command sets the VBW value for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Value gt Refer to the data sheet RST 10 0 MHz Example ESP RANG1 BAND VID 5000000 Sets the VBW for range 1 to 5 MHz SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt COUNt This command returns the number of defined ranges Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Example ESP RANG COUNt Returns the number of defined ranges
168. Power PSEN RST IFPower Example SWE EGAT SOUR IFP Switches the gate source to IF power Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 295 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt COMMent Comment Defines a comment for one of the traces for gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace Parameters lt Comment gt Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM SlotA SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERiod Value This command defines the length of the period to be traced using gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace Parameters Value numeric value RST 0s Example SWE EGAT TRACI PER 5ms Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt Value This command defines the starting point for the range to be traced using gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace range 1 3 range Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST OFF Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STATe lt range gt State This command activates or deactivates tracing for a specific range using gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 296 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analys
169. R amp S FSV K84 K85 Firmware Option 1xEV DO Analysis Operating Manua Stop Code 63 IQ capturing 1173 0766 02 08 Test amp Measurement Operating Manual This manual describes the following R amp S FSV options R amp S FSV K84 1310 8803 02 e R amp S FSV K85 1310 8778 02 This manual is applicable for the following analyzer models with firmware version 2 0 and higher e R amp SGFSV 3 1307 9002K03 e R amp SGFSV 7 1307 9002K07 e R amp SGFSV 13 1307 9002K13 e R amp SGFSV 30 1307 9002K30 e R amp SGFSV 40 1307 9002K39 e R amp SGFSV 40 1307 9002K40 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Printed in Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S FSV is abbreviated as R amp S FSV
170. RAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Range Log 10 dB Range Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 152 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a aa SS SS SS a es es ee ee Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Range Log 5 dB Range Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Range Log 1 dB Range Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Range Log Manual Range Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis manually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Di
171. RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis option 3 Start the measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey 4 Set the center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 833 49 MHz 5 Set the reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm 6 Select a bandclass a Press the Bandclass softkey and select BandClass 0 800 MHz Cellular Band from the list On the screen the spectrum of the signal is displayed including the limit line defined in the standard To understand where and about how much the measurement has failed the List Evaluation table shows the frequencies where spurious emissions occur Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 21 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error 4 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyses the signal over a single slot It also deter mines the power of all codes and channels The following examples show a Code Domain Power measurement on a
172. RFID 14443 RFID 14443 RFID14443 TETRA TETRA TETRA PDC PDC PDC PHS PHS PHS CDPD CDPD CDPD APCO 25 Phase 2 APCO 25 P2 PAPCo25 For the R amp S FSV the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the transmission channel The definition of the adjacent channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA 2000 is different These standards define the adjacent channel spacing from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel This definition is also used for the R amp S FSV if the standards marked with an asterisk are selected 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters The Adjust Settings softkey see Adjust Settings on page 127 automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration as described in the follow ing e Frequency span SS ee Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 191 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a SS Sn a ed Further Information The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus a mea surement margin of approx 10 If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth or the adja cent channel bandwidths being examined only a few points on the trace are avail able per channel This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the channel filter used which has a
173. Range on page 134 PeaksPerRange 1 Values 4 evaluation list information 0 22500000 9270000 1000000 2986455000 74 762840 270996094 10 576210021972656 45 762840270996094 PASS 1 9270000 4770000 100000 2991405000 100 1769561 7675781 35 990325927734375 1 490325927734375 PASS 3 4770000 9270000 100000 3005445000 100 17695617 675781 35 990325927734375 1 490325927734375 PASS 4 9270000 22500000 1000000 3018225000 74 7628402 70996094 10 576210021972656 45 762840270996094 PASS information about each peak lt range number gt lt start frequency gt lt stop frequency gt lt resolution bandwidth of range gt lt frequency of peak gt lt absolute power in dBm of peak gt lt relative power in dBc of peak related to the channel power gt lt distance to the limit line in dB positive value means above the limit gt limit fail pass 0 fail 1 gt Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files The files for importing range settings are in XML format and therefore obey the rules of the XML standard Below the child nodes attributes and structure defined for the data import is described Build your own XML files according to these conventions because the R amp S FSV can only interpret XML files of a known structure For example files look in the c r_s instr sem_std directory TEE Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 179 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Ins
174. Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 315 EI Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 154 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys To define the electronic attenuation use the E Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 319 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines wheth
175. STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 282 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 283 0 5 Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 282 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 283 0 5 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the resolution bandwidth Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 282 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 283 x Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 282 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 282 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 148 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deeg Softkeys and Men
176. Se Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE lt Mode gt This command switches between absolute and relative adjacent channel measurement The command is only available with span gt 0 and if the number of adjacent channels is greater than 0 For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured chan nel power using the command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute RELative ABSolute absolute adjacent channel measurement RELative relative adjacent channel measurement RST RELative Example POW ACH MODE REL Sets the adjacent channel measurement mode to relative SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel Name This command defines a name for the adjacent channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Parameters Name RST Adj Example POW ACH NAME ACH XYZ Defines the name of the adjacent channel as XYZ SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate channel Name This command defines a name for the specified alternate channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters Name RST ALT lt 1 11 gt Example POW ACH NAME ALT3 XYZ Defines the name of the third alternate channel as XYZ SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel lt channel gt lt Name gt This command defines a name for the specified
177. Setup for Base Station and Mobile Station Tests 5 Test Setup for Base Station and Mobile Sta tion Tests This section describes the default settings of the R amp S FSV if it is used as a 1XEV DO base station or mobile station tester Before starting the measurements the R amp S FSV has to be configured correctly and supplied with power as described in the Quick Start Guide Preparing For Use Furthermore the application firmware of the R amp S FSV K84 base station tests or K85 mobile station tests must be enabled Installation and ena bling of the application firmware are described in the Quick Start Guide chapter 3 Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument e All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm e The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation e The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections e The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet e Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded Connect the antenna output or TX output of the base mobile station to the RF input of the R amp S FSV Use a power a
178. St XTIM CDP PVSYmbol XPOW CDP XPOW CDP ABS Code Domain Power CDP result display absolute XPOW CDP RAT Code Domain Power CDP result display relative XPOW CDEP Code Domain Error Power CDEP result display XTIM CDP BSTReam Channel Bitstream result display XTIM CDP CBSTReam Channel Bitstream result display for composite data MS only XTIM CDP COMP CONSt Composite Constellation result display XTIM CDP COMP EVM Composite EVM RMS result display XTIM CDP ERR CTABle Channel Table result display XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain Peak Code Domain Error result display XTIM CDP ERR SUMM Result Summary result display XTIM CDP MACCuracy Composite EVM result display XTIM CDP PVChip Power vs Chip result display XTIM CDP PVSLot Power vs Slot result display XTIM CDP PVSYmbol Power versus Symbol result display XTIM CDP SYMB CCONst Channel Constellation result display for composite data MS mode only XTIM CDP SYMB CEVM Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display for composite data MS mode only XTIM CDP SYMB CONSt Channel Constellation result display XTIM CDP SYMB EVM Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 200 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 2 2 CALCulate Subsystem Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display RST XPOW CDP RAT Example CALC FEED XTIM CDP MACC Selects the Composite EVM result display Mode EVDO CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Subsystem The CALCulat
179. TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 322 Trigger Polarity IQ Capture Settings Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 88 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This softkey is available for code domain measurements Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 322 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 295 Trigger Offset IQ Capture Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offs
180. TX channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 288 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem Suffix lt channel gt 1 12 the TX channel Parameters lt Name gt RST TX lt 1 12 gt Example POW ACH NAME CHAN3 XYZ Defines the name of the third transmission channel as XYZ SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet Setting This command adjusts the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detec tor as required for the number of channels the channel bandwidths and the channel spacings selected in the active power measurement If necessary adjacent channel power measurement is switched on prior to the adjustment To obtain correct results a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed after the adjustment Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode The result is queried with the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult command Parameters Setting ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO Example POW ACH PRES ACP Sets the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detector as required for the ACLR measurement INIT CONT OFF Switches over to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP Queries the result of the adjacent cha
181. V DO Analysis mode is not the active measurement mode press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO option e If the 1xEV DO Analysis mode is already active press the HOME key The 1xEV DO menu is identical to the Measurement menu It contains the following commands for the different measurement types Code Domain Analyzer on page 119 Power on page 119 Ch Power ACLR on page 119 Spectrum Emission Mask on page 129 Occupied Bandwidth on page 139 CCDF on page 140 Power vs Time on page 145 For details on the measurement types see chapter 6 1 Measurements and Result Dis plays on page 32 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 31 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg 6 1 6 1 1 Measurements and Result Displays e Measurements and Result Displavs AA 32 e Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements cccceeeeeseeeeteeeeeeeeteees 65 e Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements 116 e Further IpfortmaligBl eee ere Free ee ERR e han knee heran aaa aaa aaa dn SERRE E ROS 167 Measurements and Result Displays The 1xEV DO Analysis options provide various measurement types and result displays All measurements and result displays are accessed via the MEAS key ERT EE e EE 32 e CONMOUMING the DISpIBy nee e Ree ER RR Ae RR HERR e eR e RR Rae a aa IS ent HE aAA 33 e Code Domain Analysis Results BTS Mode 34 e Code Do
182. When using a tracking generator this command requires active normalization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dB coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Defines a reference position of 20 dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 253 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis DISPlay Subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in dB RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Select a linear scale DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for the selected result display Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant t irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Mode CDMA EVDO DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minim
183. a 199 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Gubsvetem enn 201 CALCulate LIMit PVTime Gubevsiem eee eettieeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 208 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 210 CONFigure Subsystem sesenta nien nnn annie nnn nnmnnn nenna 235 CONFigure CDPower Subsystem K82 K84 sss 235 DISPlay S bsystem oiii eere nnna eterne eerte or EE Fono De EE Enna Denia 248 INSTrument Subsystem essent nn nennen nante nnn 255 SENSe Subsysterm enceintes recreo tree nre to o EE Le a 255 SENSe CDPower Subsystem sss eene nennen nnns 256 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 265 STATUS subsystem ient terii ient eiii ESNA 300 Le EE 301 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 194 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 9 7 9 1 7 9 2 7 9 3 7 9 4 7 9 5 7 9 6 7 9 7 7 9 8 7 9 9 7 9 10 7 9 11 7 9 12 7 9 13 7 9 14 7 9 15 7 9 16 7 9 17 7 9 18 7 9 19 7 9 20 7 9 21 7 9 22 7 10 7 10 1 7 10 2 7 10 3 7 11 7 11 1 7 1 Notation TRACe DATA Results eire tinere eese EES cran asina 301 Code Domain Power BTS mode 302 Code Domain Power MS mode nenne 303 General Results Channel Results BTS Mode 303 Result Summary MS Mode 305 Power vs Chip BTS Mode 306 Power vs Halfslot MS Mode 307 Power vs Symbol eene nennen nen nnn nennen nnne en nnns 307 Compo
184. ables For more information on softkeys dialog boxes and parameters concerning channel tables refer to Channel Table Settings on page 73 6 4 3 Channel Type Characteristics The following table provides an overview of channel type characteristics for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option K84 Channel Spreading Symbol Modulation Type Chips per Slot Symbols Bits per slot and Code Type Factor Rate per Slot and Mapping or Q Mapping Com Code plex PILOT 32 38 4 ksps BPSK I 96 2 192 6 6 12 MAC Subt 0 1 64 19 2 ksps BPSK I BPSK Q 64 4 256 4 4 8 OOK ACK I OOK Subt 2 3 128 9 6 ksps ACK Q OOK NAK 2 2 4 OOK NAK Q PREAMBLE Subt 0 1 32 38 4 ksps BPSK I Preamble length 2 2 4 64 4 4 8 128 8 8 16 256 16 16 32 512 32 32 64 1024 Subt 2 64 19 2 ksps BPSK I 64 1 1 2 128 2 2 4 256 4 4 8 512 8 8 16 1024 16 16 32 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 172 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN Further Information Channel Spreading Symbol Modulation Type Chips per Slot Symbols Bits per slot and Code Type Factor Rate per Slot and Mapping orQ Mapping Com Code plex Subt 3 128 9 6 ksps BPSK I or BPSK Q 64 0 5 0 5 1 128 1 1 2 256 2 2 4 512 4 4 8 1024 8 8 16 DATA Subt 0 1 2 76 8 ksps QPSK 8 PSK 400 4 Mapping always Complex 16 16QAM PreambleChips Modulation Type
185. ac and Data For the Preamble channel the length in chips is similarly specified thus result ing in the following options for the Preamble channel type PRE64 PRE128 PRE256 PRE512 or PRE1024 e CHAN SF Channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt e Symb Rate Symbol rate with which the channel is transmitted e Modulation Mapping Shows the modulation type of the channel For Data channels possible values are QPSK 8 PSK and 16 QAM For all other channel types possible values are either BPSK I or BPSK Q e Pwr Abs Pwr Rel Absolute and relative power referred to the total power in the channel type of the channel e T Offs Shows the timing offset between the current channel and the first active channel It can be enabled by means of Time Phase Estimation On Off e Ph Offs Phase offset between this channel and the first active channel It can be enabled by means of Time Phase Estimation On Off Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR CTABle see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 12 Channel Table Trace BTS mode on page 308 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 42 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 1 3 8 6 1 3 9 Measurements and Result Displays Chann
186. age space on hard disk gt 1st file name gt 1st file size 2nd file name gt 2nd file size nth file name gt nth file size Example CONF CDP CTAB CAT Queries catalog Usage Query only Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment on the selected channel table Parameters Comment lt string gt comment on the channel table Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 238 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME MEN TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 5 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 Defines a table with the following channels PICH 0 64 and data channel with RC4 Walsh code 3 32 CONF CDP CTAB COMM Comment for NEW TAB Specifies Comment for NEW_TAB as comment Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY lt TargetFileName gt This command copies one channel table to another Select the channel table you want to copy using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters lt TargetFileName gt lt string gt name of the new channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 for copying CONF CDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies CTAB 1 to CTAB 2 Usage Event Mode
187. ailable for subtypes 2 or higher see Subtype on page 98 Constellation of the special composite data channel only available for subtypes 2 or higher see Subtype on page 98 Composite Data Bitstream Display of demodulated bits for the special composite data chan nel only available for subtypes 2 or higher see Subtype on page 98 Symbol Constellation Channel constellation of the modulated signal at symbol level EVM vs Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display Composite Constellation Composite Constellation result display Channel Bitstream Display of demodulated bits Peak Code Domain Error Projection of the maximum error between the test signal and the reference signal Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Error Power result display For details on the displayed results and default settings refer to chapter 6 1 4 Code Domain Analysis Results MS Mode on page 47 You can configure the result displays via the Result Demod Settings on page 97 dialog box Select Opens a dialog box to select a specific channel half slot or branch for evaluation Enter the channel number and half slot number to be evaluated as a decimal in the respective field The slot range is from 0 to Capture Length 1 Refer to Capture Length for further details D Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 102 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis
188. al 1173 0766 02 08 133 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements e Editing range settings the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accordingly Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on Sym Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetric Setup mode is on not all range set tings can be set automatically Edit Reference Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Reference Range dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM measurements Reference Range 1 x Power Reference Type r Channel Power Settings Tx Bandwidth 3 84 MHz RRC Filter State ON C OFF RRC Filter Settings Alpha 0 22 Two different power reference types are supported e Peak Power Measures the highest peak within the reference range e Channel Power Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method If the Channel Power reference power type is activated the dialog box is extended to define additional settings e Tx Bandwidth Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power minimum span lt value lt span of reference range e RRC Filter State Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter e RRC Filter Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This window is only available
189. all limit settings Abs Limit Start on page 132 Abs Limit Stop on page 132 Rel Limit Start on page 132 Rel Limit Stop on page 133 Depending on the number of active power classes see Power Class dialog box the number of limits that can be set varies Up to four limits are possible The sweep list is extended accordingly Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source STATe on page 276 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 223 Abs Limit Start Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the range dBm This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 132 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STARt on page 274 Abs Limit Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the range dBm This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 132 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STOP on page 275 Rel Limit Start Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the range dBc This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accor
190. alysis CALCulate Subsystem CAL Culate nzLlMitszks DVfmebRtterence nnne nnn nnns 209 CAL Culatesn LIMitSks PVTIme RESTOFe a a aa a aaa aaa AE eaaa 209 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RVALUGC cccccccceceececeeeeseeesceseeaueeeuecueeaueeuueeeusaueeseeeueeas 210 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence lt Mode gt This command sets the reference value The standard asks for the sequence to first measure the FULL slot with the limit line relative to the mean power of the averaged time response Therefore the parameter AUTO in a FULL slot measurement should be selected In this mode the mean power is calculated and the limit lines are relative to that mean power value This value should be used also as the reference for the IDLE slot measurement With the parameter ONCE the current mean power value of the averaged time response is used to set as the fixedreference value for the limit lines The mode is switched from AUTO to MANUAL Now the IDLE slot can be selected and the measure ment sequence can be finished Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO ONCE MANual RST AUTO Example CALC LIM PVT REF AUTO Automatic reference value for limit lines The value should be set to mean power CALC LIM PVT REF MAN Manual reference value for limit lines CALC LIM PVT RVA 33 5 Set manual reference value to 33 5 CALC LIM PVT REF ONCE Set reference value to mean power
191. alysis K84 EE Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error c Inthe Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed screen A shows the power of the code domain of the signal The x axis represents the individual channels or codes while the y axis shows the power of each channel In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error screen A is always the Code Domain Power result display The second screen B is o By default the R amp S FSV K84 displays two measurement screens After a preset the first always the Result Display For more information on the display concept refer to the Display Config on page 81 softkey Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference frequency gt Press the SETUP key a Press the Reference Int Ext softkey to switch to an external reference Screen A again shows the Code Domain Power measurement and screen B the result summary After the synchronization of the reference frequencies of the devices the fre quency error should now be smaller than 10 Hz Behavior with deviating center frequency setting A measurement can only be valid if the center frequency of the DUT and the analyzer
192. amarker mz MiNimum RICH 215 CAL Culate nz DETamarkercmzlSTATel nennen nn nennen 216 GAECulatesms DEL Tamarkerem TRACE nanan anaa edd 216 er DER EN EE EE 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative eene enne n nas 217 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzN eene nsn sse nstesa isst aisi sss n rs daas 217 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X Reference This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the frequency reference for delta marker 2 Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters Reference Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the reference For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the level reference for delta marker 2 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker
193. ame as that of the transmit signal e Seta PN Offset Open the Result Settings dialog box Inthe PN Offset field enter 200 Again screen A shows the CDP measurement screen B the result summary In the result summary the Trigger to Frame result is not correct Also the error message SYNC FAILED indicates that the synchronization has failed Inthe PN Offset field enter 0 After adjusting it the PN offset on the R amp S FSV is the same as that of the signal In the result summary the Trigger to Frame value is now shown correctly Measuring the Composite EVM The Error Vector Magnitude EVM describes the quality of the measured signal com pared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 16 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 Deeg Measuring the Composite EVM vector represents the ratio of the measured signal to the ideal signal on symbol level The error vector is equal to the square root of the ratio of the measured signal to the reference signal The result is given in In the Composite EVM measurement the error is averaged over all channels by means of the root mean square for a given slot The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the examined slots and the y axis show
194. ample CDP IQL 10 Sets the capture length to 10 Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower LCODe Mask Defines the long code mask of the branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form Parameters Mask Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO Example CDP LCOD I HF Define long code mask Mode CDMA EVDO SENSe CDPower LCODe Q lt Mask gt Defines the long code mask of the Q branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form Parameters lt Mask gt Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO Example CDP LCOD Q HF Define long code mask Mode CDMA EVDO Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 258 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level of the R amp S FSV to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic response by a too low signal to noise ratio Example CDP LEV ADJ Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power Usage Event Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt Branch gt This command selects when the mapping mode is not Complex whether the or Q branch should be analyzed Parameters Branch 1 Q RST Example CDP MAPP Q Selects the Q branch Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower MMODe Mode This command defines the mappi
195. and defines which limits are evaluated in the measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt State gt ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values AND Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if both limits fail OR Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if at least one limit failed RST REL Example CALC LIM ESP PCL LIM ABS Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 226 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MAXimum lt Level gt This command sets the upper limit level for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always ends at 200 dBm i e the upper limit of the last power class can not be set If more than one power class is in use the upper limit must equal the lower limit of the next power class Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt RST 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 MAX 40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to 40 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum
196. annels the value 9 is returned lt POFFset gt If the evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned lt CDPRelative gt relative level of the channel referenced to total power in the Le 0 channel type dB lt CDPAbsolute gt absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot Le si dBm lt EVMRms gt Error vector magnitude rms lt EVMPeak gt Error vector magnitude peak lt MTYPe gt Modulation type 0 BPSK l 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 5 2BPSK if complex analysis selected for PILOT PREAM BLE or MAC 7 9 4 Result Summary MS Mode The command returns 25 values in the following order lt SLOT gt lt PTOTal gt lt PPICh gt lt PRRI gt lt RHO gt lt MACCuracy gt lt PCDerror gt lt ACTive gt lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt DRPich gt lt RHOVerall gt lt TFRame gt lt CERRor gt lt IQOFfset gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFF set gt lt CDPRelative gt lt CDPabsolute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt Value Description Range Unit Global results of selected half slot lt SLOT gt Half slot number lt PTOTal gt Total power dBm lt PPICh gt Pilot power dBm lt PRRI gt RRI
197. ar Write edt eeoa ra asri REER 109 174 Max lol o WEE 110 174 Miri Hold E 110 175 Ku E 110 175 trigger ll 71 88 108 Trigger lou EE 71 89 109 Trigger menu Gc E 108 Trigger Source External SOTIKBy cso vives c EE eee PER ERE ER es 70 88 108 Trigger Source Free Run CARET Mt 70 88 108 TX Settings EX IQ BOX 5 ariete nid 115 U Upper case commands sse 197 Upper Level Hysteresis ONO ea oed bui m E c ut 112 V VBW RMS detector ccccccccceccsssceecesssseeececessnsaeees 158 174 Video bandwidth ccccceeeesssee ceeeeeeeeseesetsnsaeeaeeneeees 157 View trace mode cceecccccccccccecee sesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 110 175 W WEIGHTING filler c rere ert rp rrr 124 Y Y Axis UE Tun EE 105 Y AXIS MINIMUM Aes ceve cues tato dE ele cit penetret 105 Z Zoom ale TE 110 175
198. aracteristics of the channel types refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 171 Remote command SENSe CDPower CTYPe on page 257 Mapping Type Select Channel Settings The mapping mode determines whether the complex signal the or the Q branch is analyzed in the measurement Use manual mapping to obtain the option of examining any channel type as either a complex signal or in the and Q branch This setting is valid for any channel type Also refer to Mapping Auto on page 72 Remote command SENSe CDPower MMODe on page 259 Mapping Auto Select Channel Settings Automatically sets the type of mapping to be used in the measurement according to the following table Channel type Mapping Pilot lor Q MAC lor Q Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 72 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Channel type Mapping Preamble lorQ Data Complex Remote command SENSe CDPower MMODe on page 259 Channel Table Settings Opens the Channel Table Settings dialog box and the corresponding submenu Predefined Channel Table Settings Channel Search Mode Predefined Auto Search Inactive Channel Threshold 49 9 dB Channel Tables DO16QAM DOS8PSK DO_IDLE DOQPSK ixEV DBO standard table Predefined chan
199. ard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option 3 Start the measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey 4 Set the center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 878 49 MHz 5 Set the reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm 6 Select a bandclass a Press the Bandclass softkey and select BandClass 0 800 MHz Cellular Band from the list On the screen the spectrum of the signal is displayed including the limit line defined in the standard To understand where and about how much the measurement has failed the List Evaluation table shows the frequencies where spurious emissions occur Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 12 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error 3 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyses the signal over a single slot It also deter mines the power of all codes and channels The following examples show a Code Domain Power measurement on a test model with 9 channels In this measurement changing some parameters one after the other should demonstrate the resulting effects values adapted to the measurement sig
200. ask sssssssssese 129 K84 we 63 Power Classes onto ener etn rene innt 137 start frequency ET 149 Step size Center frequency ss esses 147 Stop TrequenhOy EE 149 Subtype KIG 78 KO 98 supply voltage external noise source 113 166 sweep EE 108 165 Sweep Continue single sweep ssseseeeesreeesesrereees 107 163 CONMUMUOUS erret tnter prt rire nens 107 163 Single org MME scciesscccsescsenciechadeteanccextecessssecwanteteossese sweep list Fast SEM remote control s eerren 269 Sweep List Symmetrical 2 2 2 rto ieee 133 Sweep menu ae K Sweep time COUDIING os 159 164 Symbol Constellation v 45 313 KOS E e 57 Synch Multicarrier Settings K S EE 89 Synchronization e WEE 90 Auxiliary pilot EE 90 Channel Power 90 K S 90 BW 90 remote Control i rrr 263 T Time Phase Estimation CDM eg 79 K84 remote command eese 264 LM H 99 trace power measurement sss 127 Trace Clear Write 109 174 Trace menu WD E E A OA 109 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 Trace mode le 110 175 Blank EE 175 Cle
201. ating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 113 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Full Scale Level Signal Source The Full Scale Level defines the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 317 Level Unit Signal Source Defines the unit used for the full scale level Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 317 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level Signal Source If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 317 Digital IQ Info Displays a dialog box with information on the digital UO input and output connection via the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 if available The information includes e Device identification e Used port e Maximum digital input output sample rates and maximum digital input output trans fer rates e Status of the connection protocol e Status of the PRBS descewing test Digital Baseband Info Digital IQ Input Connected Device SMU200A Serial Number 103634 Port Out A Digital Input Sample Rate 100 MHz Max Digital Input Transfer Rate 100 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Passed Digital IQ Output Connected Device Ex
202. ation Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand Unit dBm Defines dBm as unit Yes if the Refer enceLevel node is used RFAttenuation Mode Manual Auto RF Att Mode on page 131 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Preamplifier ON OFF Preamp on page 131 Yes 6 4 11 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement You can change the settings manually or via XML files The XML files offer a quick way to change the configuration A set of ready made XML files for different standards is already provided For details see table 6 15 You can also create and use your own XML files for details see chapter 6 4 10 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 179 All XML files are stored under Chr sNinstr Nsem std Use the Load Standard softkey for quick access to the available XML files see Load Standard on page 138 Table 6 15 Provided XML files Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics cdma2000 DL defaultO xml CDMA2000 BCO DL default1 xml CDMA2000 BC1 DL cdma2000 UL defaultO xml CDMA2000 BCO UL default1 xml CDMA2000 BC1 UL WCDMA 3GPP DL PowerClass_31_39 xml W CDMA 3GPP 31 39 dBm DL PowerClass_39_43 xml W CDMA 3GPP 39 43 dBm DL PowerClass_43_INF xml W CDMA 3GPP 43 INF dBm DL PowerClass_negINF_31 xml W CDMA 3GPP INF 31 dBm DL WIBRO DL PowerClass 29 40 xm
203. basic unit For the other modes the corresponding options are required Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 196 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SSS ESE O P H sm u Notation Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage lt 1 4 gt TYPE VIDeo LINear
204. ber of sweeps started with single sweep which are used for calculating the average or maximum value If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed For Power vs Time measurements the command the sets the number of half slots to be analyzed Parameters lt NumberSweeps gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 GSM 200 PHN 1 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end SENSe SWEep EGATe lt State gt This command switches on off the sweep control by an external gate signal If the external gate is selected the trigger source is automatically switched to EXTernal as well In case of measurement with external gate the measured values are recorded as long as the gate is opened During a sweep the gate can be opened and closed several times The synchronization mechanisms with OPC OPC and WAI remain completely unaf fected The sweep end is detected when the required number of measurement points 691 in Spectrum mode has been recorded Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT ON Switches on the external gate mode SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Switches on the edge triggered mode SWE EGAT HOLD 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 us SWE EGAT LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 us INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Operating Manual 1173
205. bits within an ON OFF keying modulation are identical the modulation cannot be recognized as an ON OFF keying modulation If both bits contain 1 ON the modulation is identical to a BPSK and is recognized as BPSK If both bits contain 0 OFF there is no power within that code and slot and therefore no modulation is detected If the eval uation is set to MAPPING COMPLEX the separate and Q branch detection within the result summary is no longer selected and the modulation type is a 2BPSK with the coding number 5 via remote Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 98 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements As of Subtype 2 the R amp S FSV K85 can demodulate the new demodulation types B4 Q4 Q2 Q4Q2 and E4E2 For the data channel the software also provides the new results displays Composite Data EVM Composite Data Constellation and Composite Data Bitstream In R amp S FSV K85 there is no difference between subtype 2 and subtype 3 in the software Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 247 Code Order Result Demod Settings Sets the sorting of the channels for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error result displays Hadamard order By default the codes are sorted in Hadamard order i e in ascending order You can see the power of each code in this way there is no distinction between channels apparent If ther
206. ble keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob 5 Press the ENTER key to display the help topic The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed Changing the zoom 1 Change to the Zoom tab 2 Setthe zoom using the rotary knob Four settings are available 1 4 The smallest size is selected by number 1 the largest size is selected by number 4 Closing the help window gt Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 9 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Introduction 2 Introduction Overview of Firmware Options R amp S FSV K84 K85 This section contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSV equipped with Application Firmware R amp S FSV K84 or K85 It covers operation via menus and the remote control commands for the 1xEV DO Analysis This part of the documentation consists of the following chapters chapter 3 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 on page 11 Explains some basic 1xEV DO base station tests chapter 4 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 on page 20 Explains some basic 1xEV DO mobile station tests e chapter 5 Test Setup for Base Station and Mobile Station Tests on page 29 Describes the measurement setup for base station and mobile station tests chapter 6 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis on page 31 Describes the instrument functions of 1XxEV
207. cceeceeeeeeessteeeeeeetees 71 88 108 trigger edge ette teens 71 88 108 Positive Peak detector sssssssssss 173 power bandwidth percentage sese 139 Power Classes SEM MM 137 power measurement sssssessssseeneeenert 119 WACO EE 127 Power Measurement KBA dee 62 Power Reference KBS S 100 Power vs Chip KBA e PP 39 306 307 MI t 51 Power vs Symbol K84 K85 Power vs Time K84 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 339 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Index Preamble Channel KSA E 72 Preamplifier B22 69 87 105 154 Dre trigger sie e enel ehe tiere tera 71 89 109 R R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 114 315 R amp S Support cjl Em 115 reference value channel power esee 128 reference level channel Dower s sssssrrercroraseniersiosrsnesosnsne 119 129 146 DII M cen 69 86 105 155 Reference level esses 68 86 104 151 Reference Level Digital e sa ocen Reference Manual m K84 remote command seen 210 Reference Mean Power eene 145 K84 remote command seen 209 Reload Channel Table Lt Resolution bandwidth Restart On bel eere e nir teilen eene K84 remote
208. cent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value O to 100dB limit for the lower and the upper alternate lt UpperLimit gt adjacent channel RST 0 DB Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are obtained Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 222 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis Example CALCulate Subsystem CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit
209. chronization of the Code Domain Power measurement If at all possible the transmitter and the receiver should be synchronized The unit of the frequency error is either Hz or ppm referred to the carrier frequency e Chip Rate Error Shows the chip rate error 1 2288 Mcps in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and therefore in possible synchroni zation errors for Code Domain Power measurements This measurement result is also valid if the analyzer could not synchronize to the 1xEV DO signal e Trigger to Frame Reflects the timing offset from the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the first slot In case of triggered data acquisition this corresponds to the timing offset frame to trigger trigger offset start of first slot If it was not possible to synchronize the R amp S FSV to the 1xEV DO signal this mea surement result is meaningless For the Free Run trigger mode dashes are displayed e Rho Pilot Shows the quality parameter RHO for the pilot channel Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 36 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Measurements and Result Displays e Rho Overall 1 2 Shows the quality parameter RHO for all chips and over all slots According to the standard the averaging limit is on the half slot limit e Rho Mac Shows the quality parameter RHO for the MAC channel e Rho Data Shows the quality parameter RHO for the Data channel
210. cified range Different from manual operation this setting is independent of the defined limit check type Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Limit gt 400 to in 400 dBc RST 50 dBc Example ESP RANG3 LIM REL STAR 20 Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the start frequency of the range SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP Limit This command sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independently of the defined limit check type Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Limit 400 to in 400 dBc RST 50 dBc Example ESP RANG3 LIM REL STOP 20 Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the stop frequency of the range Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 275 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt STATe State This command sets the type of limit check for all ranges Suffix lt range gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined RELative Checks only the relative limits Relative limits are defined as rela tive to the measured power in the reference range AND Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when both limits are violated OR Combines the absolute and relati
211. ciprocal to that of the manual operation span RBW Parameters lt Ratio gt Range 0 0001 to 1 RST 0 01 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 279 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE SENSe Subsystem Example BAND RAT 0 01 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE FilterType This command selects the type of resolution filter For detailed information on filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 176 and chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 176 When changing the filter type the next larger filter bandwidth is selected if the same filter bandwidth is not available for the new filter type 5 Pole filters are not available when using the sweep type FFT Parameters lt FilterType gt NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORMal Example BAND TYPE NORM SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo Bandwidth This command defines the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are speci fied in the data sheet Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND VID 10 kHz SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO State This command couples and decouples the VBW to the RBW Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio to define the ratio VBW RBW Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Operati
212. cn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 252 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 155 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg 6 3 5 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Ref Level Position Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis The setting range is from 200 to 200 0 corresponding to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 253 Grid Abs Rel Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis not available with Linear range Only available for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements Abs Absolute scaling The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the reference level Absolute scaling is the default setting Rel Relative scaling The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB The scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit for details on unit settings see the Unit softkey Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 251 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface o
213. code class Code class of the channel usually 4 since the CDEP is displayed in base code number code number of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 312 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 9 20 7 9 21 TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit lt error power gt absolute level of the error power no difference sel of power between the Hadamard and BitRe dB verse order power ID power indication 0 1 3 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 3 Quasi inactive channel on the analyzed branch the channel is not occupied but an active channel exists on the other branch The Hadamard or BitReverse order is important for sorting the channels see the SENSe CDPower ORDer command With Hadamard order the individual codes are output in ascending order With BitReverse order codes which belong to a particular channel are adjacent to each other Since an error power is output for the code domain error power consolidation of the power values is not appropriate The number of codes that are output therefore generally corresponds to the base spreading factor 16 Symbol Constellation The command returns two values the real and imaginary parts for each symbol in the following order re 0 gt im 0 gt re 1 gt im 1 gt re n gt im n gt In BTS mode the number of results depends o
214. command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 298 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweeping Sweep on page 159 FFT on page 159 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 176 e Auto on page 160 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 298 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 164 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis b M i Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Note The same applies when a tracking generator inter
215. cordingly Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Mode gt AFTer BEFore Example ESP RANG3 INS BEF Inserts a new range before range 3 ESP RANG1 INS AFT Inserts a new range after range 1 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STARt lt Level gt This command sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independently of the defined limit check type Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Level gt 400 to in 400 dBm RST 13 dBm Example ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STAR 10 Sets an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start frequency of the range Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 274 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STOP Level This command sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independent of the defined limit check type Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Level gt 400 to in 400 dBm RST 13 dBm Example ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STOP 20 Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of the range SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STARt lt Limit gt This command sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the spe
216. cordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 252 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 319 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto soft key this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula level mixer levelinput RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead
217. cted slot e Symbol Rate Shows the symbol rate with which the channel is transmitted e Channel SF Shows the code number and its associated spreading factor Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 38 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE 6 1 3 4 Measurements and Result Displays e Symbol EVM Shows the peak and the mean values of the Error Vector Magnitude For further details refer to the EVM vs Symbol result display e Timing Offset Shows the timing offset between the selected channel and the first active channel in the channel type e Phase Offset Shows the phase offset between the selected channel and the first active channel in the channel type e Channel Pwr Rel Shows the relative channel power referred to the total power of the channel type e Channel Pwr Abs Shows the absolute channel power referred to the total power of the channel type e Modulation Type Shows the modulation type of the channel Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate n MARKer cm FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 201 Power vs Chip This result display shows the power for all chips in a specific slot Therefore a trace consists of 2048 power values The measurement
218. ctor This detector is selected since it correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measure ment point The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling frequency which is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected Based on the sample values the power is calculated for each measurement point using the following for mula Paws IER si N 3 where s linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A D converter N number of A D converter values per measurement point Paus power represented by a measurement point When the power has been calculated the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point In principle the sample detector would be possible as well Due to the limited number of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel the sample detec tor would yield less stable results e Trace averaging The Adjust Settings softkey switches off this function Averaging which is often per formed to stabilize the measurement results leads to a too low level indication and should therefore be avoided The reduction in the displayed power depends on the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be measured e Reference level The Adjust Settings softkey does not influence the reference level It can be adj
219. cy span to its maximum Example FREQ SPAN FULL SENSe FREQuency STARt lt Frequency gt This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters lt Frequency gt 0 to fmax min span RST 0 fmax IS Specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 283 7 6 2 5 SENSe Subsystem Example FREQ STAR 20MHz SENSe FREQuency STOP lt Frequency gt This command defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters lt Frequency gt min span to fmax RST fmax fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz SENSe POWer subsystem SENSeJPOWer ACHannel AGCPalrs iere eroe cenate need sn ken edd a na dd NEE EEN 284 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel usus 285 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel eese 285 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDWlD Al Termate channelz 285 ISENGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil TerAl Pa ACHannel eene 286 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channels sees 286 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel channels eese 286 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel csse 287 IGENGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil Tel STATetAl Temate channel ere reree rrene 287 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil Tel STATetcCHAhNnel c
220. d selects a specific set for further analysis Parameters lt Set gt Example Mode Range 0 to 1 RST 0 CDP SET 20 Selects the 20 set CDMA EVDO SENSe CDPower SLOT lt Slot gt This command selects the slot that is evaluated in the Code Domain Power Diagram and is used for slot based evaluations in the Code Domain Result Summary Parameters lt Slot gt Example Mode 0 to capture length 1 RST 0 The capture length is defined via the SENSe CDPower TQLength on page 258 command CDP SLOT 2 Selects power control group 2 EVDO SENS CDP SMODe Mode The mehtod used for the two synchronization stages the frame synchronization detec tion of the first chip of the frame and the rough frequency phase synchronization Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 263 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO The following modes are tried sequentially until synchronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchronization is reported If the result of the correlation methods sync on Pilot and Auxiliary Pilot becomes increasingly worse due to bad power conditions the non data aided synchroniza tion works optimally and synchronization should be successful BIL ot For frame synchronization this method uses the correlation char acteristic of the known pilot channel i e pilot chan
221. d using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 17 Peak Code Domain Error on page 312 6 1 4 15 Code Domain Error This result display shows the difference in power of the test signal and an ideally gener ated reference signal In the diagram the codes are plotted on the x axis The number of codes corresponds to the base spreading factor which depends on the channel type Refer to chapter 6 4 3 Channel Type Characteristics on page 172 for an overview of the spreading factors for each channel type The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the error power of each channel Since it is an error power active and inactive channels can be rated jointly at a glance The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single half slot Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 61 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Error Power IQ 1 Clrw Start Code 0 2 Code Stop Code 31 Fig 6 28 Code Domain Error result display The power values of the active and inactive codes are displayed in different colors e Yellow active code e Cyan inactive code Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDEP see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsyst
222. d via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 74 field Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP MACCuracy see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA lt TRACeX gt see chapter 7 9 8 Composite EVM on page 307 6 1 3 7 Channel Table Starts the Channel Occupancy Table analysis In this result display all active channels are displayed Therefore the channel table can contain up to 146 entries one entry for Pilot and Preamble channel type each 16 entries for the Data channel type and 128 entries for the MAC channel type 64 on the and Q branch respectively The channels are listed in the following order first the Pilot channel then the MAC and Preamble channels and the Data channel last Within the channel types the channels are sorted by ascending code number The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 41 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Measurements and Result Displays Channel Table IQ 1 Clrw Channel Walsh SymRate Power Power T Offs P Offs Type Ch SF e dBm dB ns mrad Fig 6 7 Channel Table result display The R amp S FSV determines the following parameters for the channels e Channel Type Shows the channel type of the active channel Possible values are Pilot M
223. de All menus not described here are the same as for the base unit see the description there Softkeys of the Measurement Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Measurement menu in CDMA2000 Analysis or 1xEV DO Analysis mode It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description Code Re ENEE 119 OWN EE 119 o 1 5 MCI 119 Ch LT PIS E EE 119 L EE 120 UF EE 121 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 116 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements DE 0 4 1 ee te ege 121 Big EE 121 L Channel Setup re eri teo tk recae o epe Tie bv mu dat 121 Dic NC T 122 L ACLR Pec ies tia adidas tad uita d ds iuda tede intt 123 Ri 0 0 EE 123 E EES 124 L Weighting Eiter 124 e RR DTE 125 MEL Ner c NEED 125 L Relative Um 126 L Absolute Limit 126 Ee NNNM 126 L Chan PWr HZ ccccccsescscscscscececscssssscscscscecsssssesssesesesesesssssseesesesenesssssens 126 L AT E 126 e EE 127 VES Ae BEE 127 ER An EE 127 B 081 7 E 127 L EE 127 E T BE CEP NT EM 127 L Fast AUEREN entretien 128 L Set CP Reference nne esser nest etae 128 L Ee BEE 129 EA BW eocen dd gestae pas A a 129 Spectrum E e 129 L Sweep E 129 L Sweep List dialog box 130 L fsenge Start Range SIOp eass essetis ssi tri edad denegare 130 m 50 MONET
224. der to get the correct peak at the position where the frame begins This correlation method may fail if the power of the underlying pilot channel is too low compared to the total power In this case the expected correlation peak is hidden by the upcoming auto correlation noise of the bad hypothesis The frequency phase synchronization also takes advantage of the known linear phase of the pilot channel Auxiliary Pilot Similar to synchronization on pilot but with the different known sequence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel The benefits and problems of this approach are therefore identical to the synchroni zation on pilot This mode is useful if the signal does not contain a pilot channel Channel This frame synchronization method does not require a pilot channel Power because it analyzes the power of any specified channel currently code 3 with spreading factor 4 which is the data channel 2 Again the chan nel power must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 Only for the correct position the result is low inactive channel or high active channel in contrast to the wrong hypothesis Obviously a small band exists for which we will not get a power drop or peak if the power of the tested channel is nearly equal to the noise of the other hypotheses from total signal The frequency phase synchronization works in the same way as for the methods above with the
225. difference that here both pilot channels are tried consecutively Remote command SENS CDP SMODe on page 263 Long Code Mask Synch Multicarrier Settings Defines the long code mask for the branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form The value range is from 0 to 4FFFFFFFFFF Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe I on page 258 Long Code Mask Q Synch Multicarrier Settings Defines the long code mask for the Q branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form The value range is from 0 to 4FFFFFFFFFF Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe Q on page 258 Multi Carrier Synch Multicarrier Settings Selects or deselects the multi carrier mode The mode improves the processing of multi carrier signals It allows the measurement on one carrier out of a multi carrier signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 242 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 91 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Enhanced Algorithm Synch Multicarrier Settings Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multi carrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time If both the Enhanced Algorithm and the Multi Carrier Filter are deactivated the multi carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 244
226. dingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 132 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STARt on page 275 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 132 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a a SS SS a a es es ee i Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Rel Limit Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the range dBc This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Sweep List dialog box on page 130 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP on page 275 Close Sweep List Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Closes the Sweep List dialog box and updates the measurement results Insert before Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 20 For further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 187 Remote command ESP RANG3 INS BEF see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert on page 274 Insert after Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Inserts a new range to the right of the currently focused range The
227. dth Bandwidth Type FilterType lt VBW Bandwidth Bandwidth gt lt Detector gt Detector lt Detector gt Sweep Mode SweepMode Time SweepTime gt lt Amplitude gt lt ReferenceLevel Unit dBm Value Value gt RFAttenuation Mode Auto Unit dB Value Value gt Preamplifier State State gt lt Amplitude gt lt Range gt Table 6 12 Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand FileFormatVersion 1 0 0 0 Yes Date YYYY MM DD Date in ISO 8601 format No HH MM SS Name lt string gt Name of the standard Yes Instrument Type FSL Name of the instrument No Application SA K72 K82 Name of the application No Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 182 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis El Further Information Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand LinkDirection Name Downlink Uplink Yes None ShortName DL UL No Reference Yes Power Method TX Channel Power Yes TX Channel Peak Power Reference lt string gt No Channel Table 6 13 Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand StartPower Value lt power in dBm gt The start power must be equal Yes to the stop power of the previ ous power class The Start Power value of the first range is
228. e limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement must be globally switched on using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESuLt It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 218 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis lt k gt Parameters lt State gt Example CALCulate Subsystem irrelevant ON OFF RST OFF CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels
229. e 270 IGENGeIECGbechum RANGe zangez BANDwidtb Vleo enn 271 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt COUNL ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeaaceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaaaaeneees 271 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zange D I ee 271 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE 271 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARL ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeeneteeeees 272 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeees 272 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zangez INbPutATTenuation rer errorsrnrere nene 273 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 267 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO esses 273 IGENGeJECGbechum RANGe zangez INPuGAIN STATe eneren erererorererersrernenen 274 SENSe ESP ctrum RANGe lt range gt INSert seen 274 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source ABSolute STARt eeeeeeeess 274 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source ABSolute S TOP oeseeeeess 275 SENSe ESPectrum RANGezrange LIMit source RELative STARt esses 275 SENSe ESPectrum RANGez range LIMit source RELative STOP 275 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zangez LUMitzsourcez GTATe rer erorersrrnr nene 276 IGENGeJEGbechum RANGe zangez RL Eve 276 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME 276 SENSe ESPectrum RANG
230. e 330 Return values lt Result gt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6to14 15 Example STAT QUES SYNC EVEN Usage Query only Mode CDMA EVDO Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 300 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 8 7 9 7 9 1 7 9 2 7 9 3 7 9 4 7 9 5 7 9 6 TRACe Subsystem TRACe Subsystem The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instrument s internal trace memory Toe E DADA faces EE 301 TRACe lt n gt DATA Data Returns the measurement results for the selected trace Suffix n 1 4 window Query parameters lt Data gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 CTABle LIST TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 Reads out the trace data of measurement windows 1 to 4 The return values for each measurement type are described in chapter 7 9 TRACe DATA Results on page 301 CTABle For the Channel Table result display reads out the maximum values of the timing phase offset between each assigned channel and the pilot channel see also chapter 7 9 14 Channel Table CTABle BTS Mode on page 310 LIST Returns the peak list For each peak the following entries are given lt peak frequency gt lt absolute level of the peak gt lt distance to the limit line gt Usage Query only Mode EVDO TRACe DATA Results The measurement results for a specific trace are queried using TRACe lt n gt DATA The format of the results varies according to the measurem
231. e Export Name dialog box to save the result in ASCII format to a specified file and directory For further details refer also to the ASCII File Export softkey ASCII File Export on page 135 Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST on page 325 ASCII File Export Save Evaluation List List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the ASCII File Export Name dialog box and saves the active peak list in ASCII format to the specified file and directory The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing the marker data For details on an ASCII file see chapter 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format on page 178 This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel It is necessary to define as a separator for the data import Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point It is therefore possible to select between separators decimal point and comma using the Decim Sep softkey see Decim Sep on page 136 An example of an output file for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements is given in chapter 6 4 9 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask on page 179 Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 323 MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST on page 325 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 135 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analys
232. e MARKer FUNCtion subsystem checks the marker functions in the instru ment CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESUuIt ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 201 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonCENTer seen ennt nn snnt nas 204 GALCulatesmnsMARKersm FU NGtOn PIQF unen ta denunce donas un ne noce iy xm nacexns 204 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonbOWerMODE 205 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESUIt cccccccccescceceseceeeeeceseeeceseeeeees 205 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ cccccccecceceesesseceeceeeseeeees 206 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SEL Ct c cccccscccescececeeceeetesecneeeceeeeaees 207 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHon ZO0OM nennen tense s nnns en sss Eni 208 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the measured and calculated values of the Code Domain Power analysis The channel type can be set by means of the SENSe CDPower CTYPe command the slot number by means of the SENSe CDPower SLOT command and the code number by means of the SENSe CDPower CODE command Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt m gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 201 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Query parameters lt ResultType gt ACTive CDEPeak CDERms CDPabsolu
233. e can be reduced by using an external frame trigger and entering the correct PN offset If the search range for the start of the power control group and the PN offset are known then fewer possibilities have to be tested This increases the measurement speed Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference input of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors e Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIGGER GATE IN to the external trigger output of the signal generator Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMU Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO BTS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 15 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 Deeg 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 5 Meas
234. e first and last range are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Note the rules for the lt Frequency gt parameter specified in chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 187 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value RST 250 0 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 2 52 MHz range 3 Example ESP RANG1 STAR 100000000 Sets the start frequency for range 1 to 100 MHz SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP Frequency This command sets the stop frequency for the specified range For further details refer to the SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt command Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 272 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SS SS SSS SE a a ee es SENSe Subsystem Note the rules for the lt Frequency gt parameter specified in chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 187 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value RST 2 52 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 250 0 MHz range 3 Example ESP RANG3 STOP 10000000 Sets the stop frequency for range 2 to 10 MHz SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation Value This command sets the attenuation for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum H
235. e is a channel covering several codes the display shows the individual power of each code Example for base spreading factor of 64 0 64 1 64 2 64 63 64 Bit Reverse order Bundles the channels with concentrated codes i e all codes of a channel are next to one another In this way you can see the total power of a con centrated channel Example for base spreading factor of 64 0 64 32 64 16 64 48 64 8 64 40 64 15 64 47 64 31 64 63 64 For further details on the code order refer to the Hadamard and BitReverse Code Tables in the Appendix on page Remote command SENSe CDPower ORDer on page 260 Normalize Result Demod Settings Select this parameter to eliminate the DC offset from the signal By default the parameter is deselected Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 260 Time Phase Estimation Result Demod Settings Actives or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels as to the pilot channel If deactivated or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the cal culation does not take place and dashes instead of values are displayed as results Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 Operation Mode Result Demod Settings The operation mode is used for the channel search Access In ACCESS mode only PICH always available and DATA channels can exist Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 99 R amp S FSV K84
236. e is optional which means that it is not nec essary to include the SENSe node in command sequences Note that most commands in the SENSe subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here SENSe CDPower Subsystem c ccceccccccceeeesecceeeeeeeenseeneeeeeeeeneneaeeeeeesenseaaaeeenensensaes 256 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 265 SENSe ADJust Subsystem eege rere Medea od eee 265 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 255 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 6 2 2 7 6 2 3 7 6 2 4 7 6 2 5 7 6 2 6 7 6 2 7 7 6 1 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum Gubevsiem eene nnns 267 SENSe BANDwidth subsystem ssssesseeenee eene nennen 278 SENSe FREQuency subsvstem nennen enne 281 SENSe POWer subevstem eene nennen rennen nennen nnns 284 SENSe SWEep subevstem eee nnne 293 Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem ssssessseeee 299 SENSe CDPower Subsystem This subsystem sets the parameters for the code domain measurements mode SENS amp CDPOoWerAVERAg6 ect egre EENS 256 SENSE ICDPOWERGODE LEER 257 SENSe CDPONeECTY Ee ient Iur ee ENNEN ede deanna NEE ee eene 257 SENSeJGDPawerlo Wiesheld 22 and taxed et Seed e eed uates baa BEE eg 257 E Ee Re UE 258 SENSeJCODPoWeDEGODB e ii rece eaan aana aana aaaea aariak Aaaa 258 ISENS CDPower LC ODE EE 258 SENS amp CDPowerEEVelADUUSL 2
237. e lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeneees 277 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range TRANSducer esses enne nennen 277 SENS amp e JESPecirumiRRANge riiic seeder rrr eee ia ren e Eae dee RR Ded necu s I ede ede 278 ISENSe TESPectrumilN d ocn teer sette cn bann qe dex done ep exo zin na aa ade Cd Mee REOR a 278 SENSe ESPectrum BWID Bandwidth This command defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power reference range This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power reference type see SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 278 Parameters Bandwidth minimum span lt value x span of reference range RST 3 84 MHz Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP BWID 1 MHZ Sets the Tx bandwidth to 1 MHz SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe State This command activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter This setting only takes effect if channel power is selected as power reference type see SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 278 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP FILT OFF Deactivates the use of an RRC filter Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 268 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis a a a SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa Value This com
238. e path and the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Example MMEM STOR TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 in the file TEST ASC OUTPut IF SOURce Source This command selects the source of the IF output Parameters lt Source gt IF intermediate frequency output VIDeo video output 200 mV RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF output connector OUTPut TRIGger PortLevel This command selects level of the Trigger Out port Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 326 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 11 7 11 1 Programming Examples Parameters lt PortLevel gt LOW HIGH RST LOW Example OUTP TRIG HIGH SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt State gt In remote control mode this command switches on or off the instrument display If switched on only the diagrams traces and display fields are displayed and updated The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote con trol Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON Programming Examples This chapter provides some examples for typical remote control programs Retrieving Trace Results The example shows the results of a TRACE DATA query for 2 channels with the following configuration PICH 0 16 CC 4 I sf dB DAT
239. e step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size manual input RST SPAN Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 282 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis aa a SENSe Subsystem Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt Range 1 to 100 RST 10 Default unit PCT Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Default unit Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ SENSe FREQuency SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the frequency span Parameters lt Span gt min span to fmax RST fmax fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ SPAN 10MHz SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL This command sets the frequen
240. e switched on SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command sets the channel bandwidth of the specified TX channel in the radio com munication system The bandwidths of adjacent channels are not influenced by this mod ification With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 176 Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID CHAN2 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of the TX channel 2 to 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio trans mission system If the bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the bandwidths of all alternate adjacent channels are automatically set to the same value With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 176 Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ACH 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the s
241. easured channel power MANUAL One of the three specified limit lines is set The selection is made with the chapter 7 2 4 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsys tem on page 224 command RST AUTO CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO Activates automatic selection of the limit line CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive lt State gt This command sets the power classes used in the spectrum emission mask measure ment It is only possible to use power classes for which limits are defined Also either only one power class at a time or all power classes together can be selected Suffix lt n gt lt k gt lt Class gt Parameters lt State gt Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 irrelevant irrelevant 1 4 the power class to be evaluated ON OFF RST OFF 225 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUNt lt NoPowerClasses gt This command sets the number of power classes to be defined Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt irrelevant Parameters lt NoPowerClasses gt 1 to4 RST 1 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe State This comm
242. easurement CCDF measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution func tion signal statistics CDPower Code Domain Analyzer measurement ESPectrum check of signal power Spectrum Emission Mask OBWidth measurement of the occupied bandwidth POWer Signal Channel Power measurement PVTime measurement of power versus time RST CDPower Example CONF CDP MEAS POW Selects Signal Channel Power measurement Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt lt State gt This command activates an automatic burst alignment to the center of the diagram Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP PVT BURS ON Activates the automatic alignment Mode EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart lt State gt If switched on this command evaluates the limit line over all results at the end of a single sweep The sweep is restarted if this result is FAILED Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 245 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Example Mode Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CONFigure Subsystem CONF CDP PVT FRES ON Restarts a single sweep if the result evaluation is failed EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST STATe lt State gt With this command the list evaluation which is off by default for backwards compatibility reasons can be turned on Parameters lt State gt Example Mode ON OFF RST OFF CONF CDP PVT LIST
243. ece th po ka dana tees 242 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME ecccceccecccenceecseeeeeteneeceeeeeeeeesancanaeaeanetenens 242 CONFloure CDbower BITGlCTAblebtztore enne nennen nnne 242 CONFigure CDPower BTS C EE ET 242 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier tGTATel nen 242 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer tSTATel esee 243 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency sees 243 CONFigure CDPower BTGlMCAbrer FILTer ROFF onceden iaiia 243 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE eese enint 244 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGO essent en ns 244 CONFigure CDPoWer BIS MEASUtremal EE 245 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 235 CONFigure Subsystem CONFloure CDbower BTGlbvfime BURG 245 CONFigure CDPowerBTS PVIEmeTRESIAIT ete tr a aa a aa ia aaia 245 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTimeLIST ISTAT erret eene itae 246 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST RESUIt 2 eese eieenet een 246 CONFigure CDPowerLB EK GEET 247 CONFigure CDPower BTS TFSLOL oerte Innere cette ances 247 CONFigure GDPowerlBTS SUBTJpe crista erae eerta Fito serena Pete ee eR Rage ee Eaa 247 CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass lt Bandclass gt This command selects the bandclass for the measurement R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CONFigure Subsystem Parameters lt Bandclass gt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
244. ed channel is nearly equal to the noise of the other hypotheses from total signal The frequency phase synchronization works in the same way as for the methods above with the difference that here both pilot channels are tried consecutively RST PlLot Mode EVDO MS mode SENSe CDPower TPMeas lt State gt This command actives or deactivates the timing and phase offset evaluation of the chan nels to the pilot Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 264 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deeg 7 6 2 7 6 2 1 7 6 2 2 7 6 2 3 7 6 2 4 7 6 2 5 7 6 2 6 7 6 2 7 7 6 2 1 SENSe Subsystem If the value is OFF or if more than 50 channels are active the command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 201 returns a value of 9 for the timing and phase offset as the result If the value is ON the timing and phase offsets are calculated and returned The results are queried using the TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 301 command and the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 201 command Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP TPM ON Activate timing and phase offset Mode EVDO Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual SENSe ADJust Subsystem 0 0 0 cee eececcccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeessaaaaeeenenseaeecenennenecaeeeneenenaes 265 SENSe ESPectrum Gubevsiem eene 267 SENSe BANDwidth SUDSYStOM 0
245. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeetees 314 Code Domain Power BTS mode The command returns three values for each code in a channel in the following order code number gt lt absolute level relative level gt lt power ID Value Description Range Unit lt code number gt code number of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 lt absolute level gt absolute level of the code channel at Co dBm the selected channel slot relative level relative level of the channel refer 9 dB enced to total power in the channel type power ID power indication 0 1 0 inactive channel 1 active channel The number of codes that are displayed corresponds to the spreading factor The spread ing factor in turn depends on the selected channel types Therefore 32 value triplets are returned for PILOT and PREAMBLE channels 16 value triplets for DATA channels and 64 value triplets for MAC channels see chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 171 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 302 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis b a a A A e gm S 7 9 2 7 9 3 TRACe DATA Results In addition the output depends on the mapping settings The output is either the branch the Q branch or the complex signal Code Domain Power MS mode The command returns four values for each code in a channel in the following order code class code number gt
246. eei hf eee eed eege 314 TRIGger Gommarnds 2 ronde tee haee ree eade ead Ree vd 320 Other Referenced Commande 323 INPut commands INPut ATTenuation Value This command programs the input attenuator To protect the input mixer against damage from overloads the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals not by using the DOWN command The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly In the default state with Spectrum mode the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument If the attenuation is programmed directly the coupling to the reference level is switched off This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters Value RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Mode all Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 314 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis EES Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level state ON or switches the input attenuation to manual entry state OFF This function is not available i
247. eere onin AER tet AAR 259 E Eer RI E EE 259 E Eer RI et RE 259 SENSe CDO Power lee 260 SENSeICDPOWerOPE RAW C edee 260 SENSe COP GWERORDO T 260 SENS Ree TE 261 SENS amp TCDPOWeEPN OF SSL idiot nicl cesieed ces LR Roc ense leben i EET E ANAE aa 261 SENSe CDPowWerPREPBIGRCB 2 aptae EES eekleg 261 E Ee RI e 262 SENS CDPOWeESBANG 2 coitu eastern deeds perpe epe ed deere EAD o ea Dac Ux Ein 262 SENSE ICDPOWerSET COUN E 262 SENSe CDPower CT DE 263 SENSeJCDPONERSSLO T onset nube cre outre ren derer edes save dada pado eode diens 263 ek E KREE 263 SENSE IC DPOWET T PMES C gedd 264 SENSe CDPower AVERage lt State gt This command can be precisely enabled by means of ON when the Code Domain Power analysis is active refer to CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 199 If averaging is active the CDP is calculated over all slots and displayed as called for by the 1xEV DO standard Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST 0 Example CDP AVER ON Activate averaging CDP relative over all slots and display on screen A Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 256 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Mode Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem EVDO SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command selects the code number The maximum number depends on the channel type Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Code number depending on the channel type as described in t
248. efault channel tables are replaced by this action In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Result Settings This softkey opens the Result Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 77 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Result Settings Common Settings Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements SC Revision SubType 0 1 SubType 2 SubType 3 Normalize Time Phase Est PN Offset Multi Carrier Settings Cut Off Frequency Power Settings Code Power Subtype Result Settings Multi Carrier On e Off Enhanced Algorithm C On off Multi Carrier Filter C On Off Filter Type 6 Lowpass RRC Roll Off Factor On e Off Absolute Relative CDP Average Close Specifies the characteristics of the signal you want to analyze In subtype 2 the number of active users increases That means that the spreading factor number of orthogonal codes doubles for channel types MAC and PREAMBLE The amount of returned trace data in the MAC and PREAMBLE channels is different for subtype 0 1 and 2 depending on the channel type and selected evaluation see chap ter 6 4 3 Channel Type Characteristics on page 172 The R amp S FSV detects all the channels on a per slot basis Therefore the R amp S FSV recognizes changes in the channel configuration and modulation over
249. el Bitstream This result display provides information on the demodulated bits for the selected channel type All bits that are part of inactive channels are marked as being invalid by means of dashes For 64QAM modulation is displayed for 16QAM modulation for 8PSK modulation for QPSK and for BPSK 17 The measurement evaluates a single channel type over a single slot Bitstream Table IQ 1 Clrw EES Be EE ee ee ee eee Fig 6 8 Channel Bitstream result display Select a specific symbol using the MKR key If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of displaying use the marker to scroll inside the list Depending on the modulation and the channel type a slot may contain a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 400 bits For more information on this topic refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 171 Depending on the modulation type a symbol consists of the following bits e BPSK 1 bit only the or the Q component is assigned in case of complex mapping a 2BPSK modulation is displayed with both the and Q components e QPSK 2 bits I component followed by the Q component e 8PSK 3 bits e 16QAM 4 bits e 64QAM 5 bits Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP BSTReam see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To
250. elected channel type In case of an analysis of the Data channel the results of complex analysis are approximately 3 dB higher than the results of a separate or Q analysis This is because 50 96 of the power values are distributed to and Q respectively for the complex modulation types of the DATA channel type Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDP OrCALC FEED XPOW CDP RAT seechapter 7 2 1 CAL Culate FEED Subsystem on page 199 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 35 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg Measurements and Result Displays To query these results use the command TRACe DATA lt TRACeX gt see chapter 7 9 1 Code Domain Power BTS mode on page 302 6 1 3 2 General Results The General Results show the data of various measurements in numerical form for all channels Fig 6 2 General Results result display Results for all channels The General Results in the upper part of the table show results for all channels and over all slots of a specific set e Carrier Frequency Error absolute and relative Shows the frequency error referred to the center frequency of the R amp S FSV The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSV and that of the device under test Differences of more than 4 0 kHz between transmitter and receiver frequency impair the syn
251. els below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive The parameter is available in the Auto Search mode of the Channel Table Settings dialog box The default value is 40 dB With this value all channels with signals such as the 1xEV DO test models are located by the Code Domain Power analysis Decrease the Inactive Channel Threshold value if not all channels contained in the signal are detected Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 257 Channel Tables Channel Table Settings In this field a list of the available channel tables is shown To activate a predefined channel table select the table name by using either the touchscreen or the the cursor keys and pressing the ENTER key The selected channel table is the basis for future measure ments until you choose another or select Auto Search An active channel table must completely describe the supplied signal Using the softkeys customized channel tables can be defined or existing channel tables can be modified Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 238 New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings All three softkeys open a dialog box with the same layout and the same corresponding submenu The New softkey opens the New Channel Table dialog box In this dialog you can build a new channel table All fields are empty The Copy softkey copies all elements of the selected channel table and opens the Copy Channel Table dia
252. em on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 19 Code Domain Error MS Mode on page 312 6 1 5 RF Measurement Results 6 1 5 1 Signal Channel Power The Signal Channel Power measurement analyses the RF signal power of a single chan nel with 1 2288 MHz bandwidth over a single trace The displayed results are based on the root mean square The configuration is according to the 1xEV DO requirements Beneath the measurement screen the bandwidth and the associated channel power are displayed The other screen elements match that of the screen of the Spectrum Analyzer mode The default settings are in accordance with the 3GPP2 specifications Setting Default value Frequency Span 2MHz ACP Standard 1xEV DOO MC1 Number of adjacent channels 0 Adjacent Channel Power On eee eee Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 62 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE 6 1 5 2 6 1 5 3 Measurements and Result Displays For details on the softkeys of the Signal Channel Power measurement refer to the Power on page 119 softkey in the Measurement menu Adjacent Channel Power The Adjacent Channel Power measurement analyses the power of the TX channel and the power of adjacent and alternate channels on the left and right side of the TX channel The number of TX channels and adjacent channels can be modified as well as the
253. ence level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 Blank Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 250 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 175 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Information 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace Using video band widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth only the signal average is displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed If pulsed signals are to be measured it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the resolution bandwidth VBW 10 x RBW for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured correctly The following filter types are available e Normal 3dB Gaussian filters The Gaussian filters are set by default The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet e CISPR 6 dB filters MIL Std 6 dB filters Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel filters Fo
254. ent type and is described here Code Domain Power BTS mode esesessseees eiie eene nnne 302 Code Domain Power MS Md e 2cc ccccccccesseneaeeeeeeesseneaeeeeeeeseeneceeeeeesesenenaeeeeeseianes 303 General Results Channel Results BTS Mode 303 Result Summary MS MOGE Jasiri doc ce de ce ete IE Te E Rd HE NEE 305 Power vs Chip BTS Mode iiie ore Ete Dieci tte rn Det te aa Le Te RI ud 306 Power vs Halfslot MS Mode citeriore me iced rt reed t tia Ra cl Te ARA 307 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 301 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 9 7 7 9 8 7 9 9 7 9 10 7 9 11 7 9 12 7 9 13 7 9 14 7 9 15 7 9 16 7 9 17 7 9 18 7 9 19 7 9 20 7 9 21 7 9 22 7 9 1 TRACe DATA Results Power va ul 307 Composite EVNM cece cee eee centr eee e eta taaaeaaaecaaaeaaneaecaeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 307 Composite Data EVM MS Mode 307 Composite Data Constellation MS Mode 307 Composite Data Bitstream MS Mode 307 Channel Table Trace BTS model 308 Channel Table Trace MS mode eene 309 Channel Table CTABle BTS Mode 310 Channel Table CTABle MS Mode 311 Channel DBitstream nennen nennen nnne enne enne 311 Peak Code Domain Error 312 Code Domain Error BTS Mode nennen nnns 312 Code Domain Error MS Mode 312 Symbol Constellaton eene nennen enne 313 EVM yS Symbol E 313 Composite Consiellatton 2 ccccccececee cece cece cee eee eaaaeaaaeaaecaeeeee
255. ep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 273 RF Attenuator Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the attenuation value for that range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation on page 273 Preamp Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Switches the preamplifier on or off Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe on page 274 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 131 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Transd Factor Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a transducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range e The x axis is linear e The unit is dB Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer on page 277 Limit Check 1 4 Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the type of limit check for all ranges For details on limit checks see the base unit description Working with Lines in SEM The limit state affects the availability of
256. er mo X eerta eren ge cce ea tio ie salta sebb a asp eb Lea babe aiu ees ee asd d 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz SREL ative eene ennt nennt nnns ennt nnn 217 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarkercmzs vi 217 CALCulate cnz DEI Tamarker mztSTATel nennen nnnnn nen tnts sent nns ntn nnt sene rnt nnne 216 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow sese 234 CALCulate lt n gt FEED CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute essen CALOCulate n LIMit k2 ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe sese CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RESUlIt sss eene nnne CAL Culate cnzLlMitckzACbowerACHannelfREL ativel enne CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATC 00 0 ee cece ceseeeneeceeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeneeseaeees CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute D CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative STATe esee 222 CAL Culate cnzLlMitckzACbowerAl Temate hannezfbREL attvel reene reerrn reren eee 222 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower GTATel ener t enne innen CAL Culate cnzLlMitck EGbechum LML CAL Culate cnzLlMitck EGbechum MODE seen enne entree nnns entis nennt sinn nnns inna CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUNt CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class LIMit GTATel renr eerrnnerrsernnee 226 CALOCulate n LI
257. er source For details on trigger modes refer to the Trg Gate Source softkey in the base unit description Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 322 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 10 3 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTern External trigger IFPower Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency RFPower Power trigger at the first intermediate frequency TIME Time interval PSEN External power sensor requires R amp S FSV K9 option RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Other Referenced Commands ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system Example ABOR INIT IMM Mode all DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or off Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command defines which decimal separator decimal point or comma is to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format Different languages of eval uation programs e g MS Excel can thus be supported Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 323 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV
258. er the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the electronic attenu ator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 319 INPut EATT on page 318 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow
259. ers lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 us Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 297 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STOP1 5ms Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms SENSe SWEep POINts lt NumberPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points to be collected during one sweep Note For Spurious Emissions measurements the maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001 Parameters lt NumberPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 691 Example SWE POIN 251 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the sweep time The range depends on the frequency span Parameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet For R amp S FSV spectrum analyzers with an FMR7 CPU board order no 1091 3204 with R amp S FSV models 1307 9002Kxx only and 1 GByte RAM the maximum capture time is 600 ms Otherwise it is 1s RST AUTO is set to ON Example SWE TIME 10s SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO lt State gt In realtime mode this command automatically sets the sweep time to 32 ms In analyzer mode this command controls the automatic coupling of the sweep time to the frequency span and bandwidth settings If SENSe SWEep TIME is used automatic coupling is switched off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example SWE TIME AUTO ON
260. ese results use the command TRACe DATA lt TRACeX gt see chapter 7 9 7 Power vs Symbol on page 307 6 1 3 6 Composite EVM This result display is for measuring the modulation accuracy It determines the error vec tor magnitude EVM over the total signal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power to the power of an ideally generated reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used The EVM is shown in The diagram consists of a composite EVM for each slot Set the number of slots via the Capture Length on page 70 field The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The selected slot is displayed red Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 40 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Measurements and Result Displays Composite EVM el Clirw Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 2 Fig 6 6 Composite EVM result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the composite EVM is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshol
261. et gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggernax sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 322 Synch Multicarrier Settings This dialog contains the multicarrier and synchronization parameters Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 89 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Synchronization Multi Carrier Settings E x Synchronization Mode Sync To Pilot C Auxiliary Pilot Channel Power Auto Long Code Settings Long Code Mask I Long Code Mask Q Multi Carrier Settings Multi Carrier C on off Enhanced Algorithm C on off Multi Carrier Filter C On off Filter Type Lowpass RRC Roll Off Factor Cut Off Frequency Sync To Synch
262. eumd 100 Bitstream Commands K S 57 Description 195 Blank trace mode ENEE 175 Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function Burst Fit D 140 K84 remote command We EID En 245 Composite Constellation KBA Action 47 314 C EUR tui nice ite Mensa i Mss 59 Composite Data Bitstream Cancel Table BEE 307 KBA A 77 97 Composite Data Constellation LG EE 56 307 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 337 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Index Composite Data EVM GS shone 307 Composite EVM KOA A0 KS4 C E FS Ti 307 K85 53 55 Continuous sweep ou eee eee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 107 163 Correction inherent nose nire retient 129 coupling default Settings 2 tree iii 162 Coupling Resolution bandwidth ssssssssss 157 Sweep time icio nitri nee ro eret 159 164 Video bandwidth Crest Facto PD l PAE ATE AE n Cut off frequency K E EE T 81 EE ER D Data Channel eegen ee o 72 default scalings of x and y axis 0 0 eee eres 143 Delete Channel eeneg dee 76 96 Delete Channel Table EE 77 97 detector e 173 DiglConf cnc M ee EE 115 Digital IQ data apt TEE 113 Digital IQ Info Remote control anc oe trennen 315 kin a 114 display configuration VGL M 81 Go m
263. evaluates the total signal over a single slot Power vs Chip ei Clrw Start Sym 0 256 Chip Stop Sym 2047 Fig 6 4 Power vs Chip result display Select the slot to be analyzed via the Select softkey Due to the symmetric structure of the 1xEV DO forward link signal it is easy to identify which channel types in the slot have power Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 39 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Measurements and Result Displays Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVChip see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA lt TRACeX gt see chapter 7 9 5 Power vs Chip BTS Mode on page 306 6 1 3 5 Power vs Symbol This result display shows the power of of a code at each symbol time The number of symbols on the x axis is between 2 and 100 depending on the channel type The measurement evaluates a specific channel type over a single slot Power vs Symbol 1 1 Clrw 84 55 dBm I 94 55 dBm T I 104 55 dBm I 154 55 dBm I 164 55 dBm Start Sym 0 2 Sym Stop Sym 31 Fig 6 5 Power vs Symbol result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVSYmbol see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query th
264. examined The measurement results that can be read out for the Preamble channel type are not valid if the analysis takes all slots into account CDP with Average Peak Code Domain Error Composite EVM These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 E Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 330 R amp S FSV K84 K85 List of Commands List of Commands POR regatta Eelere 323 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz FEUNGCionFlxedRbOmt 211 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionFl edRbOmty eene 211 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe sse nennen 212 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCHonPhNOtse AUTO 212 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe esee 212 CALCulate cnz DEI Tamarker mz LINK ee enne nennen nennt seen nnns sen rnt s sti rnt s sni nnns enn 213 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mzMAximum LEET 213 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MAximum NENT 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt 214 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK esses eene enne nnne entren nnn 214 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum LEET 215 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmumNENT eene ennt nnns nnennn enter inna 215 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum HIGH 215 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlINimum PEAK sesenta 215 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe CALCulate n DEETamark
265. f the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC DC RST AC Example INP COUP DC INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 315 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Rem
266. fault ranges and parameters For each range you can change the parameters listed below To insert or delete ranges use the Insert Before Range Insert After Range Delete Range softkeys The measurement results are not updated during editing but on closing the dialog box Edit Sweep List Close Sweep List softkey see Close Sweep List on page 133 The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set by pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file If you want a parameter set to be available permanently create an XML file for this configuration for details refer to chapter 6 4 10 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 179 If you load one of the provided XML files Load Standard softkey see Load Stand ard on page 138 the sweep list contains ranges and parameters according to the selected standard For further details refer also to chapter 6 4 11 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 185 Note If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 187 Range Start Range Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range Follow the rules described in chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 187 In order to change the start stop frequency of the fi
267. ference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the composite EVM is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 74 field Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP MACCuracy see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA lt TRACeX gt see chapter 7 9 8 Composite EVM on page 307 Channel Table Starts the Channel Occupancy Table analysis In this result display the main channel table settings of each channel are displayed The channel occupancy table can contain a maximum of 33 entries corresponding to the highest base spreading factor 16 with both and Q branch plus the RRI channel The Channel Table evaluation considers the total signal over precisely one half slot The half slot to be evaluated can be set by means of the Select softkey The channels are listed in ascending code number order within a code number first and then Q branch Unas signed codes are thus always at the end of the table Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 54 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of t
268. ference Mean Pwr see Reference Position remote control 253 Ref Level remote control sssssssss Ref Level Offset Ref Level Offset remote control Ref Level Position rre Ref Level Position remote control Ref Point Frequency remote control 211 Ref Point Level remote control 211 Ref Point Time remote control ds Ref Value remote control ssssssse Ref Value Position remote control 253 Reload K84 ee BW Res BW remote control ssssess 278 Res BW Auto remote control Res BW Manual remote control 278 279 Restart on Fail 1 nentes Restore Default Tables K84 Restore Standard Files sesessuss Restore STD Lines neret Result Settings K84 ae Result Settings K85 sssssusss RF Slot Full Idl 2 ree Save K84 d as Save As Standard s esee Save As Standard remote control 270 Save Evaluation List a Save Evaluation List remote control 325 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 Index SCALING ME 140 Select Channel Settings K84 71 Select Trace x Select Trace remote c
269. ftkeys and Menus for RF Measurements In this measurement the power of the carrier and its adjacent and alternate channels is determined Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 245 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 205 Bandclass Ch Power ACLR Opens a dialog box to select the bandclass The following bandclasses are available Band Class 0 800 MHz Cellular Band Band Class 1 1 9 GHz PCS Band Band Class 2 TACS Band Band Class 3A JTACS Band 2832 MHz and lt 834 MHz 2838 MHz and lt 846 MHz 2860 MHz and x 895 MHz Band Class 3B JTACS Band 2810 MHz and s 860 MHz except 2832 MHz and lt 834 MHz 2838 MHz and s 846 MHz Band Class 3C JTACS Band 810 MHz and gt 895 MHz Band Class 4 Korean PCS Band Band Class 5 450 MHz NMT Band Band Class 6 2 GHz IMT 2000 Band Band Class 7 700 MHz Band Band Class 8 1800 MHz Band Band Class 9 900 MHz Band Band Class 10 Secondary 800 MHz Band Class 11 400 MHz European PAMR Band Band Class 12 800 MHz PAMR Band Band Class 13 2 5 GHz IMT 2000 Extension Band Band Class 14 US PCS 1 9 GHz Band Band Class 15 AWS Band Band Class 16 US 2 5 GHz Band Band Class 17 US 2 5 GHz Forward Link Only Band Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 236 E Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 120 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO
270. g a submenu this softkey opens the Sweep List dialog box to select the filter type when measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The submenu contains the following softkeys e Normal 3 dB e CISPR 6 dB MIL Std 6 dB Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel e RRC e 5 Pole not available for sweep type FFT For detailed information on filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 176 and chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 176 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 280 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Sweep menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 162 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements ee le E GEN 163 Single SW TEE 163 Continue Single SWObD EE 163 Sweepime Manual e 163 e ln TE oT PE 164 ee ON KEE 164 7 EE 164 e EE 165 S O 165 a en E hee Dm 165 5 m 165 el E EE 165 Sweep COUME E 165 SWOOP Bee Un 166 Continuous Sweep Set
271. g the number of included samples mean and peak power and the Crest factor is displayed The default settings of the CCDF measurement are listed in the table below Setting Default value CCDF ON RBW 10 MHz Detector Sample For details on the softkeys of the CCDF measurement see CCDF on page 140 in the Measurement menu 6 1 5 6 Power vs Time The Power vs Time measurement examines a specified number of half slots Up to 36 half slots can be captured and processed simultaneously That means that for a standard measurement of 100 half slots only three data captures are necessary After the capturing Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 64 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 2 4 6 2 5 6 2 6 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements of the data the R amp S FSV averages the measured values and compares the results to the emission envelope mask You can define the emission envelope mask in the corre sponding submenu Setting Default value Frequency Span 0 Zero Span Sweep Time 833 38 Ms RBW 3 MHz VBW 10 MHz Detector RMS Trace Mode Average For details on the softkeys of the Power vs Time measurement see Power vs Time on page 145 in the Measurement menu Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The following chapters describe the menus and softkeys specific to 1xEV DO Analysis R amp S FSV 84 and R amp S
272. ge Unit lt channel type gt channel type indication 0 7 The channel type is coded with numbers as follows lt channel type gt 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE with 64chip 3 PREAMBLE with 128chip 4 PREAMBLE with 256chip 5 PREAMBLE with 512chip 6 PREAMBLE with 1024chip 7 DATA code class code class of the channel 2 7 Code class depends on channel type PILOT 5 MAC 6 PREAMBLE 5 DATA 4 spreading factor 2 ode class lt code number gt code number of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 lt modulation gt Modulation type including mapping 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 10 64 QAM lt absolute level gt absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel slot Le dBm N Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 308 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit lt relative level gt relative level of the channel referenced to total power in the Le sl channel type dB lt timing offset gt Timing offset of the channel to the frame start Referred to the s first active channel in seconds If the evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned phase offset Phase
273. ge the center frequency in steps of 0 1 kHz and observe the analyzer screen Up to a frequency error of approximately 4 0 kHz a Code Domain Power measure ment on the R amp S FSV is still possible A frequency error within this range causes no apparent difference in the accuracy of the Code Domain Power measurement In case of a frequency error of more than 4 3 kHz the probability of incorrect syn chronization increases This is indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message If the frequency error exceeds approximately 4 3 kHz a Code Domain Power mea surement cannot be performed This is also indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message Reset the center frequency of the signal generator to 833 49 MHz The center frequency of the DUT should not deviate by more than 4 0 kHz from that of the R amp S FSV Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power Ifthe code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a section of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts to detect the start of a slot To detect this start all possibilities of the PN sequence location Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 23 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 DEE Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power have to be tested in Free Run trigger mode This requires computing time This computing time can be reduced by using an external frame trigger and en
274. gs Ch Power ACLR Define the channel bandwidths for the transmission channels and the adjacent channels TX is only available for the multi carrier ACLR measurement When you change the bandwidth for one channel the value is automatically also defined for all subsequent channels of the same type The transmission channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard see chapter 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 191 e Measurements in zero span see Fast ACLR On Off softkey are performed in the zero span mode The channel limits are indicated by vertical lines For measurements requiring channel bandwidths deviating from those defined in the selected standard the IBW method is to be used e With the IBW method see Fast ACLR On Off softkey the channel bandwidth limits are marked by two vertical lines right and left of the channel center frequency Thus you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under test is within the selected channel bandwidth Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 122 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a SS a SS M a Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements If measuring according to the IBW method Fast ACLR Off the bandwidths of the different adjacent channels are to be entered numerically Since all adjacent channels often have the same ba
275. gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 10dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Value This command defines a reference level offset Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 252 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis DISPlay Subsystem Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt Range 200 to 200 RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid When using a tracking generator only with option R amp S FSV B9 or B10 requires active normalization and in Bluetooth mode option R amp S FSV K8 this command defines the position of the reference value for all windows Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corresponds to the upper display border Range 0 to 100 RST Spectrum mode 100 PCT with tracking generator or time display 50 PCT Default unit PCT Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid
276. guration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous ranges are removed The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges For details see Symmetric Setup on page 133 Symmetrical ranges fulfull the conditions required for Fast SEM mode see chap ter 6 4 13 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements on page 188 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements In order to improve the performance of the R amp S FSV for spectrum emission mask meas urements a Fast SEM mode is available If this mode is activated several consecutive ranges with identical sweep settings are combined to one sweep internally which makes the measurement considerably more efficient The displayed results remain unchanged and still consist of several ranges Thus measurement settings that apply only to the Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 188 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Il Further Information results such as limits or transducer factors can nevertheless be defined individually for each range Prerequisites Fast SEM mode is available if the following criteria apply e The frequency ranges are consecutive without frequency gaps e The following sweep settings are ide
277. hannelz er ererorsrnrn nenene 287 Ee ee ENTREE 288 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannelNAME ACHannel esses eene eren 288 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME AL Temate channelz sese 288 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel channels eee 288 SENS amp JTPOWer ACHannelPRESel retenues enar er e ehe eR La Ra EEN 289 IGENGe JPOWer ACHannel DRESGerCHRL EVel nene 289 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE ementi 290 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO eese 290 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANUal essen 290 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel sese 291 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel eese 291 ISENGe JPOWer ACHannel GbACngCHAhNnel channelz nene 291 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt eese ener nnne nnns 292 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDIH A 292 SENS eG POWer HSP CGO ME 292 SENSe ee e leen TEE 292 SENSePOWenT e 293 e SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs lt ChannelPairs gt This command sets the number of adjacent channels upper and lower channel in pairs The figure O stands for pure channel power measurement R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SS MM EE ae Se SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt ChannelPairs gt 0 to 12 RST 1 Example POW ACH ACP 3 Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3 i e the adjacent chan nel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and 2 ar
278. hapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control Appendix Printer Interface Appendix LAN Interface Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSV in general and the Spectrum mode in particular Furthermore the software options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are descri bed here The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expanded by more advanced measurement examples In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide a description of the basic analyzer commands and pro gramming examples is given Information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages is also provided Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 5 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Preface Documentation Overview In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSV is not included in the option manuals The following Operating Manuals are available for the R amp S FSV e R amp S FSV base unit in addition R amp S FSV K9 Power Sensor Support
279. he table below RST 0 Example CDP CODE 11 Selects code number 11 Mode EVDO Channel Type Spreading factor Code number PILOT 32 0 31 MAC REV 0 64 0 63 REV A 128 0 127 PREAMBLE REV 0 32 0 31 REV A 64 0 63 DATA 64 0 31 SENSe CDPower CTYPe lt ChannelType gt This command is used to select the channel type The number of results then changes in most analyses such as code domain power symbol EVM and bit stream because either a different spreading factor or a different number of symbols is available for the analysis Parameters lt ChannelType gt Example Mode PlLot MAC PREamble DATA RST PILOT CDP CTYP MAC Select MAC channel type EVDO SENSe CDPower ICTReshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power which a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 257 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SE ESS EE a ee Se SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 to 10 RST 40 dB Default unit dB Example CDP ICTR 10 Sets the minimum power threshold to 10 dB Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command sets the capture length in multiples of the slot Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 2 to 12 RST 3 Ex
280. he 1xEV DO Analysis Measurements and Result Displays Channel Table 1 Clrw Channel Walsh SymRate Power Power T Offs P Offs Type Ch SF ksps TE be ns mrad Fig 6 19 Channel Table result display The following channel settings are displayed Column Description Channel Type Type of channel Walsh Ch SF Number of the channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 including the spreading factor of the channel in Chan SF notation SymRate ksps Symbol rate with which the channel is transmitted 76 8 ksps to 307 2 ksps Mod Modulation of the channel Map Mapping of the channel or Q branch Status Status display Unassigned codes are identified as inactive channels Power dBm Specifies the absolute power of the channel Power dB Specifies the relative power of the channel referred to the PICH or the total power of signal T Offs ns Timing offset P Offs mrad Phase offset Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR CTABle see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 199 T To query these results use the command TRACe DATA lt TRACeX gt see chap ter 7 9 13 Channel Table Trace MS mode on page 309 6 1 4 7 Composite Data EVM This result display determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the special com posite data channel The EVM is the root of the ra
281. he active trace Mode CDMA EVDO OFDM OFDMA WiBro PHN DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When SYSTem DISPlay UPDate is turned off this command has no immediate effect on the screen Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 251 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis DISPlay Subsystem lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABS Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value the unit depends on the result display RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units for example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display Mode CDMA BT EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With the reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Suffix lt n
282. he channel type is coded with numbers as follows 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE with 64chip 3 PREAMBLE with 128chip 4 PREAMBLE with 256chip 5 PREAMBLE with 512chip 6 PREAMBLE with 1024chip 7 DATA lt code number for max The code number which has max timing offset value time gt lt code class for max The code class which has max timing offset value time gt lt max phase offset gt Max phase offset value of all channels rad lt code number for max The code number which has max phase offset value phase gt Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 310 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit lt code class for max phase gt The code class which has max phase offset value lt reserved gt reserved for future functionality 0 7 9 15 Channel Table CTABle MS Mode In addition to the results of the channel table which are output using the TRACE param eter the CTABle parameter provides the maximum values of the TIMING and PHASE OFFSET together with the associated channel The command returns 12 values including 6 reserved values for maximum timing and phase offsets in the following order max time offset gt code number for max time code class for max time max phase offset in rad code number for max phase code class for max phase reserved 1 gt
283. hieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves 6 4 5 Trace Mode Overview The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement Traces that are not activate are hidden Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The R amp S FSV offers 6 different trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 174 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis BREET Further Information This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 Min Hold
284. his function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 319 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the electronic attenu ator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definit
285. icated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 252 Scale Opens a submenu to define the amplitude scaling type This softkey and its submenu is available for code domain measurements in BTS mode K82 Auto Scale Once Scale Automatically scales the y axis of the grid of the selected screen with respect to the measured data The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 251 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 104 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis DEENEN Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Y Axis Maximum Scale Opens a dialog box to set the maximum value for the y axis of the grid of the selected Screen The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum on page 254 Y Axis Minimum Scale Opens a dialog box to set the minimum value for the y axis of the grid of the selected screen The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum on page 254 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed ac
286. ideal signal on symbol level The error vector is equal to the square root of the ratio of the measured signal to the reference signal The result is given in 96 In the Composite EVM measurement the error is averaged over all channels by means of the root mean square for a given slot The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the examined slots and the y axis shows the EVM values Test Setup e Connect the RF output of the Signal Generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cables with N connectors e Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors e Connect external triggering of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE to the signal genera tor s trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 25 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 EE 4 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO MS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain A
287. idth For rotary knob or UP DOWN key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or downwards Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 157 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The manual input mode of the video bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the VBW display in the channel bar Note RMS detector and VBW If an RMS detector is used the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves For details on detectors see chapter 6 4 4 Detector Overview on page 173 This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth It is also available for Power vs Time measure ments Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 280 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo on page 280 Video BW Auto Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth If you change the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recom
288. if the RRC filter is activated For further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 187 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 278 SENSe ESPectrum BWID on page 268 ENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe on page 268 ENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa on page 269 List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a submenu to edit the list evaluation settings Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 134 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements List Evaluation On Off List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the list evaluation Remote command Turning list evaluation on and off CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO on page 229 Querying list evaluation results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 301 Margin List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens an edit dialog box to enter the margin used for the limit check peak search Remote command CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin on page 229 Show Peaks List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask In the diagram marks all peaks with blue squares that have been listed during an active list evaluation Remote command CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow on page 234 Save Evaluation List List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the ASCII Fil
289. ighSPeed on page 269 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Value gt Refer to the data sheet RST 0 dB Example ESP RANG3 INP ATT 10 Sets the attenuation of range 3 to 10 dB SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command activates or deactivates the automatic RF attenuation setting for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RANG2 0INP ATT AUTO OFF Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 273 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis a a M SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe State This command switches the preamplifier on or off for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example ESP RANG3 INP GAIN STATe ON Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert Mode This command inserts a new range before or after the specified range The range num bers are updated ac
290. igher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 05 0 MHz CFlowertGHz xml LTE Cat B 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 10 0 MHz Cfhigher1GHz xml LTE Cat B 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 10 0 MHz Cflower1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_15_0_MHz_CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_15_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 20 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_20_0_MHz_CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_05_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_10_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_15_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_20_0_MHz xml LTE UL Used abbreviations BC band class UL uplink DL downlink TTA Telecommunications Technology Association Ranges and Range Settings In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters separately e Start and stop frequency e RBW e VBW e Sweep time e Sweep points Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 187 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Information e Reference level e Attenuator settings e Limit values Via the sweep list you define the ranges and their settings For details on
291. ilter for the adjacent channel POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel on page 286 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the adjacent channel to 0 35 POW ACH FILT ALT1 ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt channel gt on page 287 Activates the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT1 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel on page 286 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 to 0 35 Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate and define the limits for the ACLR measurement Limit Checking Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate or deactivate limit checking for the ACLR measurement The following rules apply for the limits A separate limit can be defined for each adjacent channel The limit applies to both the upper and the lower adjacent channel A relative and or absolute limit can be defined The check of both limit values can be activated independently The R amp S FSV checks adherence to the limits irrespective of whether the limits are absolute or relative or whether the measurement is carried out with absolute or rel Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 125 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a Se a SS a a es es ee ee Softkeys and
292. ime Phase Est Result Settings Activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels as to the pilot channel If deactivated or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the cal culation does not take place and dashes instead of values are displayed as results Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 PN Offset Result Settings Specifies the Pseudo Noise PN offset of the base station In a 1xEV DO system the PN offset is used to distinguish the base stations The PN offset determines the offset in the circulating PN sequence in multipls of 64 chips with reference to the event second clock trigger Although the parameter is always available it has an effect only in External trigger mode Remote command SENSe CDPower PNOFfset on page 261 Multi Carrier Result Settings Selects or deselects the multi Carrier mode The mode improves the processing of multi carrier signals It allows the measurement on one carrier out of a multi carrier signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 242 Enhanced Algorithm Result Settings Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multi carrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 79 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis I l i Menu and Softkey Description for
293. imization of the test parameters for details see chapter 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 191 The default setting is 14 kHz For measurements in line with a specific transmission standard the bandwidth specified by the standard for the transmission channel must be entered Remote command SENSe PONer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel on page 285 Adjust Ref Lvl span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Adjusts the reference level to the measured total power of the signal the softkey is acti vated after the first sweep with active measurement of the occupied bandwidth has been completed and the total power of the signal is thus known Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 139 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a aS aS SS a es es ee es Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Adjusting the reference level ensures that the signal path will not be overloaded and the dynamic range not limited by too low a reference level Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is distinctly below the reference level If the measured channel power is equal to the reference level the signal path cannot be overloaded Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 289 Adjust Settings Occupied Bandwidth Automa
294. ines the roll off factor of the RRC filter The roll off factor defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 244 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 243 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 80 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis b l Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Cut Off Frequency Result Settings Defines the cutoff frequency of the RRC filter The cutoff frequency is the frequency at which the passband of the filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 244 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 243 CDP Average Result Settings Activate CDP Average and the Code Domain Analysis is averaged over all slots in the set For channel type Data and Preamble this calculation assumes that preambles of different lengths do not occur in the slots If active ALL is displayed in the Slot field above the measurement screen This softkey is available for Code Domain Analysis and is required by the 1xEV DO standard Rem
295. ion select the Man mode again Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 106 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 2 5 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 319 INPut EATT on page 318 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 315 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Sweep menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for CDA measurements For RF measurements the softkeys are descri bed in chapter 6 3 6 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu on page 162 CONUMUGUS SWODD EE 107 Ceci n M 107 Continue Single SWegep ueiiicseenese nena arde ta nana bk punta aaa RR d kn nee RARE use E 2 RRRRy dn napa 107 PWV OUI eM CET 108 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep Cou
296. is Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Decim Sep Save Evaluation List List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Selects the decimal separator with floating point numerals for the ASCII Trace export to support evaluation programs e g MS Excel in different languages The values dec imal point and comma can be set Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 323 Edit Reference Range Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Reference Range dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM measurements Reference Range x Power Reference Type Power Reference Type Channel Power Peak Power Channel Power Settings Tx Bandwidth 3 84 MHz RRC Filter State ON C OFF RRC Filter Settings Alpha 0 22 Two different power reference types are supported e Peak Power Measures the highest peak within the reference range e Channel Power Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method If the Channel Power reference power type is activated the dialog box is extended to define additional settings e TxBandwidth Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power minimum span lt value lt span of reference range e RRC Filter State Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter e RRC Filter Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This window is only available if the RRC filter is acti
297. is a Se ee SS SSS a es ee s n SENSe Subsystem lt range gt 1 3 range Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1 SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE Type This command sets the type of triggering by the external gate signal A delay between applying the gate signal and the start of recording measured values can be defined see SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff on page 295 Parameters Type LEVel EDGE LEVel The gate is level triggered After detection of the gate signal the gate remains open until the gate signal disappears The gate opening time cannot be defined with the command SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDof f Note Using gating with gate mode level and an IFP trigger see TRIGgercn SEQuence SOURce on page 322 the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements EDGE The gate is edge triggered After detection of the set gate signal edge the gate remains open until the gate delay SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDof f has expired RST EDGE Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt Value This command defines the stopping point for the range to be traced using gated triggering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace lt range gt 1 3 range Paramet
298. is continuously initiated continu ous or performs single measurements single The sweep is started immediately Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 324 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis EENEG Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sequence to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sequence to continuous sweep Mode all INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum This command starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT ESP Starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement INITiate lt n gt IMMediate The command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt 0 or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated number of measurements With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Sw
299. ise nothing happens The default setting is OFF The softkey is only available if the RF Slot is set to idle mode see RF Slot Full Idle on page 145 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt on page 245 Reference Mean Pwr Power vs Time The standard asks for the sequence to first measure the FULL slot with the limit line relative to the mean power of the averaged time response Therefore you should activate the Reference Mean Power for Full slot measurements In this mode the mean power is calculated and the limit lines are relative to that mean power Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 145 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis DEE Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements This value should also be used as the reference for the IDLE slot measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 209 Reference Manual Power vs Time Select the reference value for the limits manually Also referto the description of the Reference Mean Pwr andSet Mean to Manual softkeys Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 209 Remote CALC LIM PVT RVAL numeric value Set Mean to Manual Power vs Time Pressing the softkey leads to the usage of the current mean power value of the averaged time response as the fixed reference value for the limit lines The mode is switched to Reference Manual Now the IDLE slo
300. isplay Pilot RRI Power Shows the absolute power of the Pilot channel RRI channel in dBm Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 50 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Measurements and Result Displays Pk CDE SF xx IQ The Peak Code Domain Error measurement specifies a projection of the difference between test signal and ideal reference signal to the spreading factor that belongs to the channel type This spreading factor is shown in brackets IQ Imbalance IQ Offset Shows the IQ imbalance DC offset of the signal in percent Rho Shows the quality parameter RHO calculated over a half slot According to the standard RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideally generated reference signal It is measured over all half slots Channel results The Channel Results in the lower part of the table show results for the selected channel Channel Pwr Rel Abs Channel power of the selected channel relative absolute values Channel SF Channel spreading factor Timing Phase Offset Symbol Rate Composite Data EVM RMS error vector magnitude values of composite data channel in 96 Composite Data EVM Peak EVM values of composite data channel in 96 Symbol EVM RMS Pk Symbol Error Vector Magnitude RMS Peak values Composite Data Modulation Modulation and selected branch of the composite data channel Remote control In remote control this display configuration is
301. it Parameters Level V dBm dBpW W dBmV dBuV dBuA A RST Volt Example INP DIQ RANG UNIT A Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 317 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis EENEG Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 113 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO State If enabled the sample rate of the digital baseband IQ input signal is set automatically by the connected device if the currently used sample rate is provided indicated by the lt SampleRateType gt parameter in the result of the TNPut DIO CDEVice command This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 description of the base unit Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP
302. itches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Mode all MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command stores the current list evaluation results ina lt file name gt dat file The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 325 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis EENEG Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for mat The file format is described in chapter 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format on page 178 The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMat DEXPort DSEParator command see FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 323 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 selected measurement trace lt FileName gt DOS file name The file name includes indication of th
303. ith the EXIQ menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp S EX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is mini mized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSV once again Remote command Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SG amp DiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglIConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The following chapter describes the softkeys and menus available for RF measurements in 1XEVDO BTS Analysis mo
304. ivated if necessary The output is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position reference fixed active To obtain a correct query result a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value This is only possible in single sweep mode Depending on the unit defined with CALC UNIT POW or on the activated measuring functions the query result is output in the units below Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 217 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis ne re SE SS iw CALCulate Subsystem 7 2 4 2 CALCulate LIMit subsystem CAL Culate nzLlMitcks ACbowerACHannel AbBGolute 218 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe eese 218 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel REI ativel eneren e eererorerorerensrnrnnnnnnn 219 CAL Culate nzLlMitksACBowerACHannelRESubt eese 220 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel REI ativelSTATe esses 220 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel ABSolute eese 221
305. ivates the multi carrier settings Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for multi carrier measure ments Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT OFF Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency Frequency This command sets the cut off frequency for the RRC filter Parameters Frequency Range 0 1 MHz to 2 4 MHz RST 1 25 Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT COFR 1 5MHZ Sets the cut off frequency to 1 5 MHz Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF lt RollOffFactor gt This command sets the roll off factor for the RRC filter Parameters lt RollOffF actor gt Range 0 01 to 0 99 RST 0 02 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 243 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT
306. ive RRI activity 0 the PICH is active for the entire 1024 chips of the half slot 5CHANS MS mode only Channel table with 5 channels PICH RRI DRC ACK DATA Table 6 3 Base station channel table DOQPSK with QPSK modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK Q Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 168 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EREECHEN Further Information Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 QPSK 1 16 QPSK 2 16 QPSK 13 16 QPSK 14 16 QPSK 15 16 QPSK Table 6 4 Base station channel table DO8PSK with 8 PSK modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK Q Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 8 PSK 1 16 8 PSK 2 16 8 PSK 13 16 8 PSK 14 16 8 PSK 15 16 8 PSK Table 6 5 Base station channel table DO16QAM with 16QAM modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK
307. ized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parame ters on page 191 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 289 Sweep Time Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time With the RMS detector a longer sweep time increases the stability of the measurement results Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 127 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a Se a SS a es es ee Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The function of this softkey is identical to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the Band width menu Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 298 Fast ACLR On Off Ch Power ACLR Switches between the IBW method Fast ACLR Off and the zero span method Fast ACLR On When switched on the R amp S FSV sets the center frequency consecutively to the different channel center frequencies and measures the power with the selected measurement time 7 sweep time number of channels The RBW filters suitable for the selected standard and frequency offset are automatically used e g root raised cos with IS 136 For details on available channel filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 176 The RMS detector is used for obtaining correct power measurement results Therefore this requires no software correction factors Measured values are output as a list The powers ofthe transmission channels are output in dBm the powers
308. l Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm SENSe JADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation Duration This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically for SENS ADJ LEV ON Parameters lt Duration gt lt numeric value gt in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSV determines the length of the measurement that is performed while determining the ideal reference level Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 266 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 6 2 2 SE
309. l Power of lower alternate channel 1 Power of upper alternate channel 1 Power of lower alternate channel 2 Power of upper alternate channel 2 The number of measured values returned depends on the number of adjacent alternate channels selected with SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the power is output in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN the power is output in W If SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE is set to REL the adjacent alternate channel power is output in dB CPOWer Channel power measurement In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement the query returns the power result for the reference range if this power reference type is selected With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the channel power is out put in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN 96 the channel power is output in W CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ State This command switches the query response of the power measurement results between output of absolute values and output referred to the measurement bandwith The measurement results are output with the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult command Suffix n m Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 Selects the measurement window Selects the marker 206 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1x
310. l Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto soft key this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula le Velmixer lEVelinput RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 314 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17
311. l WiBro TTA 29 40 dBm DL PowerClass 40 INF xml WiBro TTA 40 INF dBm DL PowerClass neglNF 29 xml WiBro TTA INF 29 dBm DL WIBRO UL PowerClass_23_INF xml WiBro TTA 23 INF dBm UL PowerClass_negINF_23 xml WiBro TTA 23 INF dBm UL WIMAX DL ETSN MHz 1 75 System_Type_E xml WIMAX System Type E DL MHz 2 00 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 00 MHz 14 00 MHz 28 MHz System_Type_F xml WIMAX System Type F DL System_Type_G xml WIMAX System Type G DL Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 185 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Information Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics WIMAX DL IEEE 10MHz xml WIMAX 10MHz DL 20MHz xml WIMAX 20MHz DL WIMAX UL ETSI MHz 1 75 MHz 2 00 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 00 MHz 14 00 MHz 28 MHz System_Type_E xml WIMAX System Type E UL System_Type_F xml WIMAX System Type F UL System_Type_G xml WIMAX System Type G UL WIMAX UL IEEE 10MHz xml WIMAX 10MHz UL 20MHz xml WIMAX 20MHz UL WLAN 802_11_TURBO ETSI xml IEEE 802 11 IEEE xml IEEE 802 11 WLANY802 11a ETSI xml IEEE 802 11a IEEE xml IEEE 802 11a WLANY802 11b IEEE xml IEEE 802 11b WLANY802 11j 10MHz ETSI xml IEEE 802 11j IEEE xml IEEE 802 11j WLANY802 11j 20MHz ETSI xml IEEE 802 11j IEEE xml IEEE 802 11j EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 01 4 MHz_CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 01 4 MHz CFlowertGHz xml LTE Cat
312. l channel spacing A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing ALT1 ALT2 causes a change by the same factor in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Example In the default setting the adjacent channels have the following spacing 20 kHz ADJ 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ADJ is set to 40 kHz the spacing of all other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ALT1 120 kHz ALT2 160 kHz ALT3 If starting from the default setting the spacing of the 5th adjacent channel ALT4 is set to 150 kHz the spacing of all higher adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 1 5 to result in 180 kHz ALT5 210 kHz ALT6 240 kHz ALT7 If a ACLR or MC ACLR measurement is started all settings according to the standard including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set and can be adjusted afterwards Remote command ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel on page 291 ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on page 291 ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel on page 291 Names Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define user specific channel names for each channel The names defined here are dis pla Re ENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ENSe POWer ACHa
313. l table file is not deleted Description Enter further information about the channel table Channel Type Select one of the channel types from the dropdown menu Walsh Ch SF Enter the Channel Number Ch and Spreading Factor SF For some channel types the possible values are limited or preset e g F PICH F TDPICH and F PDCH Symbol Rate ksps Display of the symbol rate Modulation Enter the modulation type for the channel Power dB Contains the measured relative code domain power The unit is dB The fields are filled with values after pressing the Meas on page 76 softkey nasce uL P c E D c c MMMP E Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 75 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Item Description State Indicates whether a channel is active or inactive DomainConflict A red bullet indicates if there s a conflict of any sorts between two or more channels e g two conflicting channel codes Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 242 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY on page 239 Add Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Inserts a new channel below the one selected For a description of the parameters of the channel refer to the New Copy Edit softkey The default values for a new channel are
314. lected Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CCONst see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 199 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 56 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE 6 1 4 9 6 1 4 10 Measurements and Result Displays To query these results use the command TRACe DATA lt TRACeX gt see chap ter 7 9 10 Composite Data Constellation MS Mode on page 307 Composite Data Bitstream This result display provides information on the demodulated bits for the composite data channel and selected half slot This measurement result is only available for subtypes 2 or higher The results are dis played for the special composite data channel regardless of which channel is selected Composite Data Bitstream el Clrw Fig 6 22 Composite Data Bitstream result display Select a specific symbol using the MKR key Enter a number and press the ENTER key the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of displaying use the marker to scroll inside the list Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP CBSTReam see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 11 Composite Data Bitstrea
315. log box The name of the new channel table is set to Copy of Sour ceChannelTableName gt The Edit softkey opens the Edit Channel Table dialog box and the corresponding menu In this dialog box you can edit an existing channel table Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 94 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Note that changes are never saved automatically Save your channel tables before end ing the application See Save softkey for details The dialog box contains the following items You can modify the white fields as you like The grey fields can not be modified these are automatically calculated by the R amp S FSV Channel Table Settings Name DO16QAM i Description 1xEV DO standard table Modulation Domain Conflict PF Save Cancel Table 6 2 Channel table settings Item Description Name Enter the name of the selected channel table which will be saved under lt name gt xml The name is case sensitive and may not contain spaces It must be a valid MS Windows file name Note that the old channel table file is not deleted Description Enter further information about the channel table Channel Type Select one of the channel types from the dropdown menu Walsh Ch SF Enter the Channel Number Ch and Spreading Factor SF For some channel types the possible values
316. lt absolute level relative level gt lt power ID Value Description Range Unit code class Code class of the channel with Hadamard order it is usually code class 4 code number code number of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 absolute level absolute level of the code channel at the La sel selected channel slot dBm lt relative level gt relative level of the channel referred to the 00 co total or pilot power see the SENSe dB CDPower PREFerence command power ID power indication 0 1 3 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 3 Quasi inactive channel on the analyzed branch the channel is not occupied but an active channel exists on the other branch Power values of the individual codes are usually given in Hadamard order the consoli dated channel power is returned in BitReverse order The Hadamard or BitReverse order is important for sorting the channels and consolidation see SENSe CDPower ORDer on page 260 With Hadamard the individual codes are output in ascending order with their code power The number of codes which are output corresponds to spreading factor 16 With BitReverse codes which belong to a particular channel are adjacent to each other and are therefore output in the class of the channel together with the channel power The maximum number of codes or channels that are output cannot be higher than spreading factor 16 and decreases
317. lt t gt MODE Mode This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces WRITE cor responds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe The number of measurements for AVERage MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the SENSe AVERage n COUNt Or SENSe SWEep COUNt commands It should be noted that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant t trace Parameters Mode WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold BLANK RST WRITe for TRACe1 STATe OFF for TRACe2 3 4 5 6 For details on trace modes refer to chapter 6 4 5 Trace Mode Overview on page 174 Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace The other meas urements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix n window For applications that do not have m
318. lters or RRC filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 176 e Auto on page 160 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE See SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 298 FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 159 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Note The same applies when a tracking generator internal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 298 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 298 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is
319. lysis option 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the Peak Code Domain Error measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Peak Code Domain Error softkey and start the measurement 5 Set the center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b In the Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 0 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box 6 Setan external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Setthe Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the diagram of the Peak Code Domain Error In screen B the result summary is displayed Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 27 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error Displaying RHO Make sure that all channels except the pilot channel code 0 64 are OFF so that only the pilot channel is available in the measurement No specific measurement is required to get the value for RHO The R amp S FSV always calculates this value automatically regardless of the code domain measurement per formed Besides the results of the code domain measurements the numeric result of the RHO measurement is shown in the result summary by default shown in screen B R amp S FSV K84 K85 Test
320. m MS Mode on page 307 Symbol Constellation This result display shows the channel constellation of the modulated signal at symbol level You can select a specific code and half slot with the Select softkey Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 57 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg 6 1 4 11 Measurements and Result Displays Symbol Constellation IQ 1 Clrw a Fig 6 23 Symbol Constellation result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CONSt see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 20 Symbol Constellation on page 313 EVM vs Symbol This result display shows the EVM on symbol level The x axis represents the symbols and the y axis shows the EVM in The number of symbols depends on the channel type and is in the range from 2 to 100 Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 171 for further information The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single slot You can select a specific code and half slot with the Select softkey EVM vs Symbol IQ 1 Clrw Start Sym 0 Stop Sym 95 Fig 6 24 EVM vs Symbol result display Inactive channels can be measured but the result is meaningless since these channels do not contain data Operating Manual 1173
321. m Freq 0 0 Hz Channel 0 32 Code Power Relative Slot Oof3 ChannelType PILOT Auto Scale SGL Inp Dig IQ Once Code Domain Power I ei Clrw Stop Code 31 1Sym Stop Sym 5 e ei dj 4 61 IQIN 12 07 2010 ke and 11 10 10 Fig 6 17 Power vs Symbol result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVSYmbol see on page 199 T To query these results use the command TRACe DATA lt TRACeX gt see on page 307 This result display is used to measure the modulation accuracy It determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the total signal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power to the power of an ideally generated reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used The EVM is shown in The diagram consists of a composite EVM for each half slot Set the number of slots via the on page 70 field Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 53 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 1 4 6 Measurements and Result Displays The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The selected half slot is displayed red Composite EVM ei Clrw 1 Half Slots Stop Slot 5 Fig 6 18 Composite EVM result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal re
322. main Analysis Results MS Mode 47 e RF Measurement hesulls ertet nent Renee e na ehe nea ue REA eR dagananeas 62 Display Concept Measurement results The code domain analyzer can show up to four result diagrams in four different screens windows at one time For each screen you can define which type of result diagram is to be displayed or deactivate the screen temporarily The current configuration of the display i e which screens are displayed and which result diagram is displayed in which screen can be stored and retrieved later Thus you can easily switch between predefined display configurations The available measurement results are described in the following sections All results are calculated from the same dataset of the recorded signal Thus it is not necessary to restart the measurement in order to switch the display mode Measurement settings The most important measurement settings are displayed in the diagram header For Code Domain Analyzer measurements the following settings are shown Ref Level 10 00 dBm Freq 15 0 GHz Channel 0 16 Att 10 dB Half Slot Oof6 Code Power Relative SGL Label Description Ref level Reference level defined in Ref Level on page 68 Freq Center frequency defined in Center on page 68 Channel Channel with spreading factor Att Attenuation Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 32 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis E
323. mand sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power reference type SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe command and if the RRC filter is activated SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe command Parameters lt Value gt 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP FILT ON Activates the use of an RRC filter ESP FILT ALPH 0 5 Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter to 0 5 SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed State This command activates Fast SEM mode to accelerate spurious emission mask meas urements For details see chapter 6 4 13 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measure ments on page 188 Note that in Fast SEM mode the following parameters cannot be changed in all ranges e Filter type see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FILTer TYPE on page 271 e RBW see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution on page 270 e VBW see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 271 e Sweep Time Mode see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO on page 277 IS e Sweep Time see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIMI on page 276 e Reference level see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range RLEVel on page 276 e RF Att Mode see
324. measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 220 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent chan nel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper alternate adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that the absolute limi
325. mended if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected resolution bandwidth Narrow video bandwidths result in longer sweep times due to the longer set tling time Wide bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth It is also available for Power vs Time measure ments Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 280 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either down wards or upwards Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 158 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis LAE a SS a es es ee Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected band width and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution
326. mined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sam ple detector is used see chapter 6 4 4 Detector Overview on page 173 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 110 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 2 8 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurement
327. mission channel with the highest power the transmission channel with the low est power or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be defined as a reference channel The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 207 Parameters Channel MINimum MAXimum LHIGhest MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowermost transmission channel for the lower adjacent channels uppermost transmission channel for the upper adjacent channels Example POW ACH REF TXCH AUTO MAX The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a ref erence channel SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual lt ChannelNumber gt This command selects a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in rel ative adjacent channel power measurements The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 207 Parameters lt ChannelNumber gt 1 to 18 RST 1 Example POW ACH REF TXCH MAN 3 Transmission channel 3 is used as a reference channel Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 290 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis a SS ES SSS SE a a ee ee Se mn
328. mote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DEI MIN LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MIN NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum The correspond ing delta marker is activated first if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement wind
329. mples E of Samples remote control of TX Chan of TX Chan remote control Power Bandwidth esses Power Bandwidth remote control ACLR Abs Rel remote control ACLR Ref Setting remote control as ACLR Ref Spacing remote control Add Channel K84 Adjust Ref Level sss Adjust Ref Level remote control 289 Adjust Ref EVI 3 5 center terres 139 Adjust Settings remote control APD remote control eesssssseeeeee 231 ASCII File EXPO 2 2 t rte rte ASCII File Export remote control ou Auto remote control sessssseeeee AUO All p Em Bandclass 2 Bust Fit TE deeg EERSTEN C N remote control esses C No remote control Cancel K84 EE VE IT CCDF remote control Center Mkr Freq remote control 204 CF Stepsize remote control sssss 282 Channel Bandwidth Channel Bandwidth remote control Channel Settings s eese Channel Spacing remote control T Channel Table Settings K84 Chan PWr Hz sisinsdiran Chan Pwr Hz remote control is Ch Power ACLR esee Clear Write iie caeteri ne reet rtr rots Code Domain Analyzer se
330. mplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 319 Adjust Ref Lvl Frontend Settings Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 267 IQ Capture Settings This softkey opens the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Common Settings Invert Q On e Off Data Capture Settings Capture Length Set Count Set To Analyze Trigger Settings Trigger Source External 6 Free Run x Trigger Polarity Positive Negative Trigger Offset 0 0 s Close Invert Q IQ Capture Settings Inverts the sign of the signal s Q component The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 262 Capture Length IQ Capture Settings Sets the number of slots you want to analyze The input value is always in multiples of the slots The maximum capture length is 32 The Capture Length field is available if Set Count equals 1 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 87 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis DEE Menu and Softkey Description for CDA
331. n 271 IGENZGe EGbechumRAhNGe zrangez Pl Ter fb nennen nenne tenens 271 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangezINPutCATTenuaton eene 273 IGENZGe EGbechumR AhNGe zangezINPuCATTenuaton AUTO 273 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangezINPuCGAINGTATe ener nnn 274 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangez LUlMit zeourcez AbBGoluteG Aht 274 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LlIMit source ABSolute STOP eese 275 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangez LUlMit zsourcez HELL ativeGTAhRt 275 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source RELative STOP sss 275 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangezLUlMit zeourcezGTATe nnt 276 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep T IME sessi 276 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe crangez GWEep TIME AUTO 277 IGENGe EGbechum RANGe zangez TRAhNsducer eene n nnn n ennt nena 277 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STARIt essent nenne 272 IGENZGe EGbechumRAhNGe rangezTEREOuencvl TOP 272 SENSe ESPectrum RRANge SENSe ESPectrum RI YiP eT SENSe FREQuency GENLTGer eec nore rri ri ten rien reap a ein deceptos on IEN Ge IEbREOuencv CENT er SGTER IENGeFbREOuencv CEN Ter STEP AUTO IENGeEbREOuencv CEN Ter STEP UNK SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor SENSe FREQuency OFFSet rn etre ere eer rhe rni ER Ra EE Red rere rna IEN Ge IER
332. n are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 282 CF Stepsize Opens a submenu to set the step size of the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be set to a fraction of the span span gt 0 or a fraction of the resolution bandwidth span 0 or it can be set to a fixed value manually Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 147 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis a aa SS SS SS a es es ee Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Apart from the Center Marker and Manual softkeys the other softkeys are displayed depending on the selected frequency span This softkey is available for RF measurements 0 1 Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 282 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 283 0 1 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the resolution bandwidth This is the default setting Remote command FREQ CENT
333. n the number of symbols and is between 2 and 100 In MS mode the number of values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 16 64 values Spreading factor 8 128 values Spreading factor 4 256 values EVM vs Symbol The command returns one value for each symbol value in symbol 0 gt In BTS mode the number of results depends on the number of symbols and is between 2 and 100 In MS mode the number of values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 16 64 values Spreading factor 8 128 values Spreading factor 4 256 values Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 313 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis EENEG 7 9 22 7 10 7 10 1 7 10 2 7 10 3 7 10 1 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Composite Constellation The command returns two values the real and imaginary parts for each chip in the fol lowing order re chip 0 gt im chip 0 re chip 1 gt im chip 1 gt re chip n gt im chip n gt The number of results corresponds to the number of chips from the 1024 chips in a half slot Other Commands Referenced in this Manual The following commands are identical to those in the base unit and are included in this manual only because they are specifically referenced to here See also chapter 7 6 SENSe Subsystem on page 255 and chapter 7 2 CALCulate Subsystem on page 198 INP t commands eee teat ren eere eret er rebote Mast
334. n the specified channel type For channel type PILOT and PREAMBLE values between 0 and 31 are valid For channel type MAC the range is between 0 and 63 and for DATA channels the range is 0 to 15 The slot range is from 0 to Capture Length 1 Refer to Capture Length for further details For the following measurements an evaluation on code level is possible chapter 6 1 3 8 Channel Bitstream on page 43 chapter 6 1 3 3 Channel Results on page 38 chapter 6 1 3 12 EVM vs Symbol on page 46 chapter 6 1 3 5 Power vs Symbol on page 40 chapter 6 1 3 11 Symbol Constellation on page 45 For the following measurements an evaluation on slot level is possible chapter 6 1 3 8 Channel Bitstream on page 43 chapter 6 1 3 3 Channel Results on page 38 chapter 6 1 3 7 Channel Table on page 41 chapter 6 1 3 1 Code Domain Power on page 35 chapter 6 1 3 10 Code Domain Error on page 44 chapter 6 1 3 13 Composite Constellation on page 47 chapter 6 1 3 12 EVM vs Symbol on page 46 chapter 6 1 3 2 General Results on page 36 chapter 6 1 3 4 Power vs Chip on page 39 chapter 6 1 3 5 Power vs Symbol on page 40 chapter 6 1 3 11 Symbol Constellation on page 45 Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 263 SENSe CDPower CODE on page 257 6 2 2 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu in MS Mode The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the main menu of the 1xEV DO BTS A
335. nal are changed to non adapted values described using the dialog boxes Alternatively most of the settings can also be modified by using the corresponding hardkeys as in the base unit e g the center frequency can be either set in the Frontend Settings dialog box or via the FREQ key o In the following examples adjusting the settings of the code domain measurements is Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO BTS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Set the center frequency and the reference level a Inthe Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey b In the Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 13 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS An
336. nal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 298 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 298 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 279 Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW lt 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 279 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value al
337. nalysis option o You can also access the main menu via the MEAS CONFIG hardkey e Ee ru aayeeeckt 85 Frontend Selunigs orco eor pep eden eee sesto a 85 CMI NNI 86 L Frequency Offalst asisten tintntesn n itd Inna uad in a nk 86 2 j r 86 D 15 e 86 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 83 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Le EE 87 ET EE 87 If Capture eor uio HT 87 fae MEE 87 e EE E 87 E ol NDERIT 88 L Set to Analyge see tesi inna in ttd eben an sneak ausa eiu 88 L Trigger Source Free Run 88 L Trigger Source Extemal E 88 L Trigger Plaid oreet hn area daa dag 88 DE it RENTRER 89 SyrichiMullcarer Seti gs iacere eec pese ha Pre ht dt Re otl exe ebd Dnus 89 s qr mec MNT m 90 L Long Code Mask Litt tete k antea d trades 91 Lon Code Mask EE 91 i 0 5 E 91 L Enhanced Aoogtm EEN 92 L Multi RE de S 92 d HE NET T MTM 92 m jl s cC A 92 Cth EE Eden TEE 93 Channel Table Set higs E 93 L Channel Search Mode 93 L Inactive Channel Threshold eene nna 94 L Channel Tables A 94 L NewiCopwEdn EE 94 DEE 96 L Delete Chiannel interiit irit tnnt ce aate nti da 96 M MERC PEPPER 96 D oo Wr c 97 e 97 mo MITES 97 o MTM MC 97 Eo MI HH 97 L Restore Default Taben 97 Result Demod Geittngs AA 97 EE 98
338. nalyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Composite EVM measurement 5 Set the center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b Inthe Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c Inthe Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box 6 Set an external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Set the Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default Screen A shows the diagram of the Composite EVM measurement result In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the Code Domain Power measurement includ ing the values for the Composite EVM Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vector represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal The Code Domain Error is the difference in power on symbol level of the measured and the reference signal projected to the class of of the base spreading factor The unit of the result is dB In the Peak Code Domain Error PCDE measurement the maximum error value over all channels is determined and displayed for a given slot The measurement cove
339. nce Select the standard and the desired measurement Set the PN offset Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 30 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analy SIS The R amp S FSV equipped with the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option K84 performs Code Domain measurements on forward link signals according to the 3GPP2 Standard Third Generation Partnership Project 2 High Rate Packet Data generally referred to as 1xEVDO The R amp S FSV equipped with the 1xEV DO MS Analysis option K85 performs Code Domain measurements on reverse link signals according to the 3GPP2 Standard This standard is based on the following specifications e CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification C S0024 B version 3 0 e Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data Access Network C S0032 B version 1 0 e Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Access Terminal C S0033 B version 1 0 When the 1xEV DO specification is mentioned in the document these standards are meant In addition to the measurements called for by the 1xEV DO standard in the code domain the 1xEV DO Analysis options feature measurements in the spectral range such as channel power adjacent channel power occupied bandwidth and spectrum emission mask with predefined settings To open the 1xEV DO settings menu e Ifthe 1xE
340. nch TRAC TRACEI Read out CDP relative of I branch 4 0 7 0 1 4 8 54 2 0 PICH is active 4 4 56 7 0 4 12 55 3 0 4 2 48 3 3 4 10 48 1 3 DATA 2 4 is quasi inactive 4 6 49 0 3 4 14 48 5 3 4 1 54 4 0 4 9 55 2 0 45 54 751 2 0 4 13 54 3 0 4 3 54 5 0 4 11 55 7 0 4 7 56 6 0 4 15 52 3 0 TRAC TRACE2 Read out CDP relative of Q branch 4 0733 35 34 4 8 52 4 0 PICH is quasi inactive 4 4 51 2 0 4 12 51 8 0 2 2 10 0 1 Channel 2 4 is now consolidated and 4 1 52 3 0 4 9 55 5 0 displayed with accumulated power 45 5y 55 1 0 4 13 57 6 0 4 3 54 6 0 4 11 54 3 0 d 9501 3 05 4 15 52 5 0 INST SEL MDO Activate 1xEV DO MS implicitly CDP relative is displayed on Screen A and Result Summary is active on Screen B Mapping is set to I INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep CDP MAPP Q Select Q branch CDP ORD HAD Set order to Hadamard INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative Hadamard Q 4 0 5 53 3 3 4 1 52 3 0 Code 0 is quasi inactive as PICH is set to I 4 25 16 1 1 4 3 54 6 0 The DATA channel is distributed between 4 4 51 2 0 4 5 55 1 0 the active codes 2 16 6 16 10 16 14 16 4 6 16 4 1 4 7 51 3 0 each with one quarter of the power i e 4 85 52 4 0 4 9 55 5 0 10 dB 6 dB 16 dB 4 10 15 8 1 4 11 54 3 0 4 12 51 8 0 4 13 57 6 0 4 14 15
341. ndwidth the other alternate channels are set to the bandwidth of the adjacent channel when it is changed Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal adjacent channel bandwidths For details on available channel filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 176 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel on page 285 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel on page 285 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt channel gt on page 285 ACLR Reference Bandwidth Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Select the transmission channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values should be referenced TX Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used Min Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a reference channel Max Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a refer ence channel Lowest amp Highest Channel The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower adjacent channels the outer right hand transmission chan nel that for the upper adjacent channels Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual on page 290 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO on page 290 Spacing Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define the
342. nel alternate channel 2 are measured 12 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and the power of the all higher and lower channels alternate channel 1 to 11 are measured Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs on page 284 Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a dialog to define the channel settings for all channels independant of the defined number of used TX or adjacent channels Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 121 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Il Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Channel Setup x Bandwidth Channel Bandwidth Channel Bandwidth TX 1 14 0 kHz ADJ 14 0 kHz TX2 14 0 kHz ALT1 14 0 kHz TX3 14 0 kHz ALT2 14 0 kHz TX 4 14 0 kHz ALT3 14 0 kHz TX 5 14 0 kHz ALT4 14 0 kHz TX 6 14 0 kHz ALTS 14 0 kHz TX 14 0 kHz ALT6 14 0 kHz TX8 14 0 kHz ALT 14 0 kHz TX9 14 0 kHz ALTS 14 0 kHz TX 10 14 0 kHz ALT9 14 0 kHz TX 11 14 0 kHz ALT10 14 0 kHz TX 12 14 0 kHz ALT11 14 0 kHz ACLR Reference TX CHANNEL 1 The dialog contains the following tabs Bandwidth on page 122 Spacing on page 123 Names on page 124 Weighting Filter on page 124 Limits on page 125 Bandwidth Channel Setup CP ACLR Settin
343. nel sequence spreading code including scrambling sequence The correlation must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 in order to get the correct peak at the position where the frame begins This correlation method may fail if the power of the underlying pilot channel is too low compared to the total power In this case the expected cor relation peak is hidden by the upcoming auto correlation noise of the bad hypothesis The frequency phase synchronization also takes advantage of the known linear phase of the pilot channel AUXiliary Pilot Similar to synchronization on pilot but with the different known sequence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel The benefits and problems of this approach are therefore identical to the synchronization on pilot This mode is useful if the signal does not contains a pilot channel POWer This frame synchronization method does not require a pilot chan nel because it analyzes the power of any specified channel cur rently code 3 with spreading factor 4 which is the data channel 2 Again the channel power must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 Only for the correct position the result is low inactive channel or high active channel in contrast to the wrong hypothesis Obviously a small band exists for which we will not get a power drop or peak if the power of the test
344. nel tables are a way to customize measurements The RECENT channel table contains the last configuration used before switching from Auto Search to Prede fined The DOQPSK DO8PSK DO16QAM and DO IDLE channel tables are included in the option per default and are configured according to the standard For details on the predefined channel tables refer to chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 168 In addition new channel tables can be created and saved to be used in measurements Channel Search Mode Channel Table Settings Defines the kind of channel table used for the measurement Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 73 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Auto The Auto Search mode scans the whole code domain including all permissible symbol rates and channel numbers for active channels The automatic search provides an overview of the channels contained in the signal If chan nels are not detected as being active change the threshold see Inactive Channel Thresh old or select the Predefined channel search type Predef Performs the code domain measurement on the basis of the active predefined channel table All channels of a channel table are assumed to be active For further details also refer to the Channel Tables field and the chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 168 Remote command CONFigure CDPower
345. ng Manual 1173 0766 02 08 280 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deeg 7 6 2 4 SENSe Subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio Ratio This command defines the ratio between video bandwidth Hz and resolution bandwidth Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command VBW RBW is reciprocal to that of the manual operation RBW VBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 01 to 1000 RST 3 Example BAND VID RAT 3 Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth 3 res olution bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE Mode This command selects the position of the video filter in the signal path Changing the video filter position is possible only if the resolution bandwidth is 100 kHz Parameters Mode LiNear The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier In linear mode measurements with a logarithmic level scale result in flatter falling edges compared to logarithmic mode The reason is the conversion of linear power values into logarithmic level val ues if you halve the linear power the logarithmic level decreases by 3 dB LOGarithmic The video filter is applied after the logarithmic amplifier RST LINear Example BAND VID TYPE LIN Video filter ahead of the logarithmic amplifier SENSe FREQuency subsystem SENSeJ FREQUSncy CENT Of trao terere x tke hne nent i RR e t e ER eee nde 282 SENS FRE Quen CENIBESTEP
346. ng mode either automatically or user defined for all channel types Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO IOQ COMPlex 10Q or Q mapping COMPlex Complex mapping AUTO Data channel type Complex PILOT MAC and PREAMBLE chan nel types OQ RST AUTO Example CDP MMODe COMP The pilot channel type and all other channel types is analyzed in complex mode Mode EVDO Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 259 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower NORMalize lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the elimination of the IQ offset from the signal Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CDPower NORMalize ON Activates the elimination of the UO offset Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower OPERation lt Mode gt The operation mode is used for the channel search Parameters lt Mode gt ACCess TRAFfic ACCess Only PICH always available and DATA channels can exist TRAFfic All channels PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC can exist PICH and RRI are always in the signal RST TRAFfic For further details refer to Code Order on page 99 DP ORD HAD ets Hadamard order RAC TRACE2 eads out the results in Hadamard order DP ORD BITR ets BitReverse order RAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in BitReverse order Mode EVDO Example na Duo Hoa SENSe CDPower ORDer lt SortOrder gt This command sets the channel sorting f
347. nherent noise eege WE 129 Input Output menu Input sample rate gellt arit retento E 113 le 70 87 lQ Capture settings eer nen 69 87 K key AMPT K84 5 rot doter ade eaten 104 AUTO SET K84 catre e decet dei 111 FREQ K84 INPUT OUTPUT e 166 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 338 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Index MEAS GUTE E MER TRACE K84 erg TRIG K845i ide ee a be sd Key INPUT OUTEBPUT iiio rnnt tenent 112 L level display range s es 141 142 152 153 WANG LEE 141 142 152 153 Level Reference 0 ccececceceeeececeeeeeseeseeseteaees 68 86 104 151 Level Unit Digital UO Interface remote control 317 Ingo P a aent 114 limit ACLR measurement eere esent 126 limit check ACLR measurement nseeeeeeeeeseeerrrerrerrrerererrreres 125 Long Code Mask K83 remote Control s sersessrercssirnsurssrssnenreriranasene 258 GD EE 91 Lower case commands cese 197 Lower Level Hysteresis kien EEEE 112 Low pass Filter o D H 80 AG 92 M MAC Channel c pP 72 mapping jer E 72 VQ K84 ee 72 K84 remote command 259 Mode K84 remote command 259 Max Hold trace mode ssssse 110 17
348. nks that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instru ment or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard oper ating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 7 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Preface Saas How to Use the Help System 1 3 How to Use the Help System Calling context sensitive and general help gt To display the general help dialog box press the HELP key on the front panel The help dialog box View tab is displayed A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed For standard Windows dialog boxes e g File Properties Print dialog etc no context sensitive help is available gt Ifthe help is already displayed press the softkey for which you want to display hel
349. nnel NAME yed in the result diagram and result table mote command ACHannel on page 288 ALTernate channel on page 288 CHANnel lt channel gt on page 288 Ej mM LH Weighting Filter Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define weighting filters for all channels Weighting filters are not available for all supported sta ndards and cannot always be defined manually where they are available The dialog contains the following fields Operating Manual 11 73 0766 02 08 124 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Field Description Channel e TX 1 18 TX channels e ADJ Adjacent channel e ALT1 11 Alternate channels Active Activates Deactivates the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent channels of the same type Alpha Defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent channels of the same type Remote command POW ACH FILT CHANI1 ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel lt channel gt on page 287 Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 1 POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN1 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel channel on page 286 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for TX channel 1 to 0 35 POW ACH FILT ACH ON See SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel on page 287 Activates the weighting f
350. nnel power measurement SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command adapts the reference level to the measured channel power and if required switches on previously the adjacent channel power measurement This ensures that the signal path of the instrument is not overloaded Since the measurement bandwidth is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth in channel power measure ments the signal path can be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below the reference level If the measured channel power equals the reference level the signal path is not overloaded Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Example POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI Adapts the reference level to the measured channel power Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 289 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis b T SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power for the relative measurement Example POW ACH REF AUTO ONCE SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO Channel This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent channel power measurements The trans
351. ns snnt n renr sena SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe range sess rennen nennen SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE EISEM SWESp el SENSe SWESP TIME ici ratae a a eso geret aee tes eter eie ce er eden aS EISE e a TIME E Re D Ei EE dE TEE Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 336 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Index A Capture Length idonee en lists 70 87 K84 remote Commande 258 ACLR 9e IC 140 absolute limit n ceeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeaeees 126 KB edu deeg EES 64 adjacent channel name remote control 288 CDP Average alternate channel name remote control 288 EE Channel Bandwidth ies K84 remote command ES channel name remote control 288 K85 EE channel names eene enne nnne 124 Center frequency seessssssess Channel Spacing As Step SIZG eelere eo FO E PP R ERO UE PERS 147 limit Check P PM CF Stepsize Lirmit Checklng EE SOfIKGy EE 103 number of channels Ge i channel i o ERES Elle le ET 122 139 relative Te NUMBER TH 121 Weighting Filter is Spacing uiia e temi e dede uec pnta 123 ACLR Measurement s sessrunssrrresssserunsriesienrirereanenisrennt Channel Bitstream Ee KBA eet acacia ad brut i ets pedes 43 311 Add Channel hip 59 Cr 76 96 channel results adjacent channel leakage ratio sess 119 KEM aei ee bn d
352. nt on page 108 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 324 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 324 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 107 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 2 6 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 324 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For s
353. ntical Filter Type see Filter Type on page 131 RBW see RBW on page 131 VBW see VBW on page 131 Sweep Time Mode see Sweep Time Mode on page 131 Ref Level see Ref Level on page 131 Rf Att Mode see RF Att Mode on page 131 RF Attenuator see RF Att Mode on page 131 Preamp see Preamp on page 131 Activating Fast SEM mode Fast SEM mode is activated in the sweep list see Fast SEM on page 130 or using a remote command Activating the mode for one range automatically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list In the provided XML files for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Fast SEM mode is activated by default SCPI command SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Consequences When the Fast SEM mode is activated the ranges for which these criteria apply are displayed as one single range The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual sweep times initially but can be changed When the Fast SEM mode is deactivated the originally defined individual sweep times are reset If Symmetrical Setup mode is active when Fast SEM mode is activated not all sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically see also Symmetric Setup on page 133 Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are applied to each included range and remain changed even after deactivating Fast SEM mode
354. ntly created channel table Press the Edit softkey to open and modify the channel table Each row in the channel table represents one channel 4 Sortthe channels in the channel table by pressing the Sort softkey The R amp S FSV Sorts the channels according to the rules listed in the Sort softkey description 5 Adda new channel by pressing the Add Channel softkey a Select a channel type e g a data channel b In the Channel Type field select CHAN from the dropdown menu c Specify the channel number a value between 0 and 127 and spreading factor d Choose the radio configuration usually 3 5 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 171 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN Further Information e Activate the channel by editing the State field The other values Symbol rate and power are automatically calculated If there is a conflict with another channel in the table a red diamond is displayed in the Domain Conflict field of the conflicting channels 6 You can delete a channel with the Delete Channel softkey Note that a channel is deleted without further notice 7 If you want to discard your changes you can restore the original table with the Reload softkey All your changes will be lost You can also restore the default channel tables delivered with the R amp S FSV with the Restore Default Tables softkey This recovery can be done even if you have saved changes to these t
355. of active chan nels is higher than 50 Example CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDP Reads out total power Usage Query only Mode EVDO CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PICH This command sets marker 1 to the pilot channel 0 16 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt m gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 204 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Example INST SEL MDO Activate 1xEV DO MS implicitly CDP relative is displayed on Screen A and Result Summary is active on Screen B INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization CALC MARK FUNC PICH Activate marker and set to pilot CALC MARK Y Query value of the CDP relative to the PICH Usage Event Mode EVDO CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE Mode This commands defines the method by which the channel power values are calculated from the current trace in the window specified by the suffix n
356. of the adjacent channels in dBm The sweep time is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results Repro ducibility increases with sweep time since power measurement is then performed over a longer time period As a general approach it can be assumed that approx 500 non correlated measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0 5 dB 99 96 of the measurements are within 0 5 dB of the true measured value This holds true for white noise The measured values are considered as non correlated if their time interval cor responds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth With IS 136 the measurement bandwidth is approx 25 kHz i e measured values at an interval of 40 us are considered as non correlated A measurement time of 40 ms is thus required per channel for 1000 measured values This is the default sweep time which the R amp S FSV sets in coupled mode Approx 5000 measured values are required for a repro ducibility of 0 1 dB 99 96 i e the measurement time is to be increased to 200 ms Remote command SENSe POWer HSPeed on page 292 Set CP Reference Ch Power ACLR Defines the currently measured channel power as the reference value if channel power measurement is activated The reference value is displayed in the Tx1 Ref Power field the default value is 0 dBm The softkey is available only for multi carrier ACLR measurements In adjacent channel power measurement with one or several carrier
357. onding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MAX NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MAX Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 214 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Re
358. ontrol a se errereen 293 Set CP Refererice eterne Set Mean to Manual Set Standard remote control 270 Tue EE Settings Overview K84 ias Settings Overview K85 sss Show PEAKS 5 nnne erre trig nonna Show Peaks remote control T Single Meas remote control ssssss Single Sweep remote control Sort K84 T Span RBW Auto IO Span RBW Manual sess Span Manual eg Span Manual remote control Spectrum Emission Mask sssesssssss Start Start remote control esses Start Frequency remote control 283 Stop 2s e Stop remote control sss Stop Frequency remote control Sweep Count eessssseeseeeee 108 165 Sweep List remote control 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 SWeep POINTS sees Asie 166 Sweep Points remote control e E Sweeptime Auto remote control Synch Multicarrier K85 ieceres Threshold remote control sssussssse Trace 12 34 5 6 remote control 2 Trace Mode remote control sss Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg remote control 295 322 Trg Gate Source remote control 295 322 T
359. or the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power result displays Parameters lt SortOrder gt HADamard BITReverse RST HADamard For further details refer to Code Order on page 99 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 260 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem DP ORD HAD ets Hadamard order RAC TRACE2 eads out the results in Hadamard order DP ORD BITR ets BitReverse order RAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in BitReverse order Mode EVDO Example na DH Ho oO SENSe CDPower OVERview State This command switches to an overview display of a code domain measurement CDP rel CDP abs CDEP If enabled the branch of the code power is displayed in screen A and the Q branch in screen B Both results can be read using TRACE DATA TRACE1 and TRACE DATA TRACE2 respectively If disabled screen A displays the branch and screen B provides the result summary display Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP OVER OFF Mode CDMA EVDO WCDMA SENSe CDPower PNOFfset lt Offset gt This command sets the PN offset of the base station in multiples of 64 chips Parameters lt Offset gt Range 0 to 511 RST 0 Example CDP PNOF 45 Sets PN offset Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower PREFerence lt Power gt This command specifies the reference power for the relative power result displays e g Code Domain Power Power
360. order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spac ing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RANGe lt Value gt This command defines the level range for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the level range setting defined with the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe command Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 10dB to 200dB RST 100dB Example CALC STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel lt Value gt This command defines the reference level for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel command With the reference level offset lt gt 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is modified by the offset The unit depends on the setting performed
361. ore than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant t trace Parameters State ON OFF RST ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis with logarithmic scaling Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 250 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis DISPlay Subsystem The command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Range gt Range 10 to 200 RST 100 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO Mode This command turns automatic scaling of the y axis on and off If on the R amp S FSV determines the ideal scale of the y axis for the current measurement results Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant t only 1 trace Parameters Mode ON Automatic scaling is on OFF Automatic scaling is off ONCE Automatic scaling is performed once RST OFF Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Activates automatic scaling of the Y axis for t
362. ored display configurations and thus easily switch between different displays of measurement results 1 Select the Predefined tab in the Display Configuration dialog box The previously stored and default configurations are listed The current configuration is displayed at the top of the dialog box 2 Select the required set of screen configurations 3 Press Apply Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 33 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis SS SS SE SS eS a es ee ee Measurements and Result Displays To store the current display configuration You can store the current display configuration in the list of predefined settings in order to switch back to it later 1 Select the current display configuration at the top of the Display Configuration dialog box 2 Click Add The current display configuration is added to the list of predefined settings To remove a predefined display configuration You can remove one of the stored display configurations 1 Select the display configuration to be removed from the Predefined tab of the Display Configuration dialog box 2 Click Remove The selected display configuration is removed from the list of predefined settings To restore the default display configurations You can restore the default set of predefined display configurations gt Inthe Predefined tab of the Display Configuration dialog box click Restore 6 1 3
363. ote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis ee ee SS SS ee Other Commands Referenced in this Manual lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sampling rate is displayed 1 Current sampling rate is displayed lt Placeholder gt for future use currently O Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the digital input fullscale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 316 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis ee E Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPut DIQ RANGe COUPIling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full
364. ote command SENSe CDPower AVERage on page 256 Code Power Result Settings Selects for the Code Domain Power measurement whether the y values are displayed as an absolute dBm or relative dB In relative mode the reference is the total power of the channel type Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 199 Display Config This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display In the Code Domain Analyzer the results are displayed in up to four screens Any result can be dis played in either screen Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 81 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Display Configuration lV Screen A active Result Diagram for Screen A Code Domain Power General Result Channel Result Power vs Chip Power vs Symbol Composite EVM RMS Channel Table Symbol Constellation EVM vs Symbol Composite Constellation Channel Bitstream Peak Code Domain Error Code Domain Error Power Close This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display configura tion The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result display configurations for meas urements in the code domain Result Display Configuration Code Domain Power Definition Code Domain Power result display General Result General measurement resul
365. ould be synchronized The unit of the frequency error is either Hz or ppm referred to the carrier frequency Composite Data Power Power of the special channel containing composite data Rho Overall 1 2 Shows the quality parameter RHO for all chips and over all half slots According to the standard the averaging limit is on the half slot limit Chip Rate Error Shows the chip rate error 1 2288 Mcps in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and therefore in possible synchroni zation errors for Code Domain Power measurements This measurement result is also valid if the analyzer could not synchronize to the 1xEV DO signal Active Channels Indicates the number of active channels Trigger to Frame Reflects the timing offset from the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the first half slot In case of triggered data acquisition this corresponds to the timing offset frame to trigger trigger offset start of first half slot If it was not possible to synchronize the R amp S FSV to the 1xEV DO signal this mea surement result is meaningless For the Free Run trigger mode dashes are displayed Slot specific results The Code Results in the second part of the table show results specific to the selected half slot Total Power Composite EVM The composite EVM is the difference between the test signal and ideal reference signal For further details refer to the Composite EVM RMS result d
366. ow lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MIN Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 215 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If the corresponding marker was a normal marker it is turned into a delta marker No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT1 ON Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on The corres
367. ower resolution Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal For details see also the Adjust Ref Lv softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 232 Power vs Time Starts the Power vs Time measurement 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode only This measurement is required by the standard for the Emission Envelope Mask For details on screen layout and default values see the description of Power vs Time Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 245 No of HalfSlots Power vs Time Change the number of halfslots used for averaging The default value is 100 Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 294 RF Slot Full Idle Power vs Time Defines the expected signal Set it to either FULL or IDLE mode The limit lines and the borders for calculating the mean power are set The lower and upper limit line are called DOPVTFL DOPVTFU for FULL and DOPVTIL DOPVTIU for IDLE mode It is possible to change these lines with the standard limit line editor Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLot on page 247 Burst Fit On Off Power vs Time Activate an automatic burst alignment to the center of the diagram If active the burst fit algorithm searches the maximum and minimum gradient between them the maximum peak is determined and from this point the 7 dB down points are searched If these are within plausible ranges the burst is centered in the screen otherw
368. ower result display Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 48 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 1 4 2 Measurements and Result Displays The standard requires an averaged code domain analysis Select CDP Average on page 81 and the R amp S FSV performs a measurement over all slots and averages the results For the Data and Preamble channels the standard assumes that in the slots preambles of different lengths do not occur Active and inactive channels are defined via Inactive Channel Threshold on page 74 The power values of the assigned and unassigned codes are displayed in different colors e Yellow assigned code e Cyan unassigned code Set the mapping with Mapping Type on page 72 The Mapping Auto function causes complex mapping to be analyzed separately for the Data channel type and mapping for the or Q branch to be analyzed separately for the other channel types In the latter case the UO selection can be set by means of Invert Q on page 70 Another option for obtaining an overview of the CDP is to enable complex mapping The code domain power is then constantly displayed as a complex analysis on screen A for the selected channel type In case of an analysis of the Data channel the results of complex analysis are approximately 3 dB higher than the results of a separate or Q analysis This is because 50 of the power values are distributed to and Q respectively for the comple
369. p A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time the submenu of the softkey is displayed Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box contains four tabs e Contents contains a table of help contents e View contains a specific help topic e Index contains index entries to search for help topics e Zoom contains zoom functions for the help display To change between these tabs press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the table of contents e To move through the displayed contents entries use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign e Todisplay a help topic press the ENTER key The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed e Tochange to the next tab press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the help topics e To scroll through a page use the rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys e To jump to the linked topic press the link text on the touchscreen Searching for a topic 1 Change to the Index tab Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 8 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Preface I ET How to Use the Help System 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these characters are displayed 3 Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key 4 Select the suita
370. p CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe on page 226 PMin PMax Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Defines the level limits for each power class The range always starts at 200 dBm INF and always stops at 200 dBm INF These fields cannot be modified If more than one Power Class is defined the value of PMin must be equal to the value of PMax of the last Power Class and vice versa Note that the power level may be equal to the lower limit but must be lower than the upper limit Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 137 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements P min P lt P max Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MINimum on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MAXimum on page 227 Sweep List Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask See Sweep List on page 129 Add Remove Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates power classes to be defined Up to four power classes can be defined The number of active power classes affects the availability of the items of the Used Power Classes dropdown menu Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive on page 225 Bandclass Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a
371. p c per 38 303 305 te EP 63 Channel Search Mode Adjust Ref Level Lg E 73 93 K84 remote command sese 259 Channel Table Result Display Amplitude menu te E EE E das baee ip creen 41 308 309 Kad eM EEUU TU 104 Le EE 54 ASCII Trace export erre nnne 178 Channel Tables attenuation KOS WEE 74 94 Option EE 106 155 Channel Table Settings Attenuation EE 73 93 Option E 106 154 Channel Type Automatic essen 106 154 o 72 MIU ME 105 154 314 K84 remote Commande 257 Option EE 105 154 Characters Auto level Sp cial sasietan aad repete tetas 197 ek 112 Clear Write trace mode sss 109 174 Auto Peak detector des Code selection of Auto Scale Once eee rennen nnne nnne 104 KGS PH 83 102 Auto Set menu Code Domain Analysis ssssssssesssese 119 eet 111 Code Domain Error Power Auxiliary pilot K eege zg Eer ATETA 44 312 SYNCHIOMIZATION irent ttr innt nnno 90 e EE 61 Average detector Code Domain Power Average trace mode sse 110 175 Gr d EE 35 302 Le X 48 B Code Number K84 remote Commande 257 band class dte tet terere ra 120 Code Order Bandwidth KOS ts 99 MERU MENTOR TEE 156 Code Power Resolution ENEE 157 M M 81 buco EE 157 KB85 ossia debere EP E
372. pecified alternate adjacent chan nels of the radio transmission system If the channel bandwidth of one alternate adjacent channel is changed e g channel 3 the bandwidth of all subsequent alternate adjacent channels e g 4 11 is automatically set to the same value Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 285 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 176 Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ALT2 30 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the adjacent channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the specified alternate channel Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT3 0 35 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate chan nel 3 to 0 35 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel channel
373. pecified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 282 Frequency Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 283 Ref Level Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 68 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis DEENS Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 252 Ref Level Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 252 Preamp On Off
374. per threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer on page 266 Lower Level Hysteresis Settings Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automat ically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer on page 266 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for CDA measurements For RF measurements see chapter 6 3 7 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements on page 166 PRUNA C DO sent 113 NOISE EE 113 ee 113 eil EE 113 L Connected Device csetera iterata atat taa 113 L Input Sample Hate 113 h t 1 em 114 ns i pnm 114 L Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 114 ENA NGI RD c 114 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 112 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis DEENEN Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements 0 DEE 115 ai esate tae oat 115 el 115 Bt CRDAENNORSRTRTUT 115 L Fittwate EE 115 L CT EG 115 KE eege ee 115 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input
375. ponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC DELT3 TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis The position is an absolute value Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 216 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt 0 to maximum frequency or sweep time Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute frequency time of delta marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the x value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position for CALC DELT FUNC FIX STAT ON The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a delta marker The corresponding delta marker is act
376. power dBm If the RRI is not active its displayed PRRI value is C200 dBm In this case the DRPich is set to 200 dB lt RHO gt RHO value for the selected channel type slot lt MACCuracy gt Composite EVM Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 305 R amp S FSV K84 K85 7 9 5 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit lt PCDerror gt Peak Code Domain error dB IQOFfset IQ offset lt IQIMbalance gt IQ imbalance 96 Global results of all half slots lt FERRor gt Frequency error Hz lt FERPpm gt Frequency error ppm lt DRPich gt Delta RRI PICH dB lt CERRor gt Chip rate error ppm lt TFRame gt Trigger to frame Note The Trigger to Frame value TFRame supplies a 9 ifthe trigger is at FREE RUN The Timing Phase Offset values TOFFset POFFset supply a 9 if timing and phase measurement is dis abled refer to CDP TPM or the number of active channels is higher than 50 Channel results lt SRATe gt Symbol rate ksps lt CHANnel gt Channel number lt SFACtor gt Spreading factor of the channel lt TOFFset gt If the evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active see S SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned lt POFFset gt If the evaluation of the timing and phase
377. ption R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 315 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Bandwidth menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only avail able with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description For Spurious Emission Measurements the settings are defined in the Sweep List dialog see the description in the base unit RES BW WANA T E usegeeCk 157 ROS BW AUO E 157 Video BW Mantal casted ae iiihanaa i 157 Video BW TE 158 Sweepime Manual Tp 158 ee te ET EE 159 WEG TYPO EN 159 Do REPE 159 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 156 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements de ll EE 159 eT RR 160 L FFT Filter Mode 160 ET CARCEREM CT EORR 160 EX EENEG 160 Coupling FRAUO occ CE 160 L RBW VBW Sine DILL 160 L AH E 161 L RBW VBW Noise TOL 161 L RBW VEMW Manu l certet rna dr ttc ett incra Eran da 161 L Span RBW Auto To 161 L Span RBW Manuel 162 L Kl E 162 RI e D 162 Res BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correla
378. query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 16 Channel Bitstream on page 311 Peak Code Domain Error The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum value for the Code Domain Error for all codes That means that in this result display the Code Domain Error is pro Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 43 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Il Measurements and Result Displays jected onto the code domain at a specific base spreading factor The spreading factor is automatically set by the channel type Set the number of slots via the Capture Length on page 70 field In the diagram each bar of the x axis represents one PCG The y axis represents the error power The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The currently selected slot is marked in red Peak Code Domain Error IQ 1 Clrw Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 2 Fig 6 9 Peak Code Domain Error result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is very large The result dis play therefore shows a peak code domain error that is too high for all slots Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable mea
379. r CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual CALCulate DELTamarker subesvstem eee eeetteeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeneenaas 210 CALCulate LIMit aubsvstem ccc cc ceceee eee eeette eee ee ete eene enne 218 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum SUDSYStOM esssssseeeeene enn 224 CALCulate PSE subsvstem mne nnne nennen 228 CALCulate STATistics subsvestem nennen 230 Other Referenced CALCulate Commande 234 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHont edRbOnt 3 211 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHontlxedRbOnty 211 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe eese 212 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHonbhNOise AUTO 212 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNGCHonbhOiselGTATel eese 212 CAL Cilat lt n DELTamarkersmesliNnk 3 decine abren eren eppure en erre Ee es 213 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM AximumlEEFT 213 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT seen enses nnns 214 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM ANimumt PDEAK eeeeeseseseeee nennen 214 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMANimumbRlcGHt enean 214 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimum LEET 215 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 210 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT enhn nennen nnns 215 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eeeeeseseeeeeee nemen 215 CAL Culate nz DEL T
380. r details see chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 176 Channel filters do not support FFT mode e RRC filters For details see chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 176 RRC filters do not support FFT mode e 5 Pole filters The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet 5 Pole filters do not support FFT mode 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters For power measurement a number of especially steep edged channel filters are available see the following table The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth For RRC filters the fixed roll off factor a is also indicated Table 6 11 Filter types Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFILter 200 Hz CFILter AO 300 Hz CFILter 500 Hz CFILter 1 kHz CFiLter 1 5 kHz CFiLter 2 kHz CFILter Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 176 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EREECHEN Further Information Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 2 4 kHz CFILter SSB 2 7 kHz CFILter 3 kHz CFILter 3 4 kHz CFILter 4 kHz CFILter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFILter 5 kHz CFILter 6 kHz CFILter 6 kHz a 0 2 RRC APCO 8 5 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFILter AM Radio 10 kHz CFILter 12 5 kHz CFILter CDM
381. range numbers of all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 20 For further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 187 Remote command ESP RANGI INS AFT see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INSert on page 274 Delete Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Deletes the currently focused range if possible The range numbers are updated accord ingly For further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 187 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range DELete on page 271 Symmetric Setup Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask If activated the current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous ranges are removed The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges Any changes to the range settings in active Symmetric Setup mode lead to symmetrical changes in the other ranges where possible In particular this means e Inserting ranges a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference range e Deleting ranges the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted Operating Manu
382. ratio resolution bandwidth span 100 This coupling ratio is the default setting of the R amp S FSV This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 001 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 281 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 161 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 3 6 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Span RBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto The span resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000 Remote command BAND RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio on page 279 Default Coupling Coupling Ratio Sets all coupled functions to the default state AUTO In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to SINE 1 1 and the ratio SPAN RBW P to 100 This softkey is available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 279 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 280 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 298 Filter Type Opens a submenu to select the filter type This softkey and its submenu are available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF Instead of open in
383. re Length field is available if Set Count equals 1 The default value is 3 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 258 Set Count IQ Capture Settings Defines the number of consecutive sets to be stored in the instrument s IQ memory One Set consists of 32 slots The R amp S FSV can capture up to 15680 slots about 26 seconds in a single sweep i e the possible value range is from 1 to 490 sets The default setting is 1 In that case you can still define the number of slots see Capture Length In case you want to capture more than one set the capture length is always 32 The R amp S FSV automatically sets the capture length to 32 and the Capture Length field is not available for modification Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 262 Set to Analyze IQ Capture Settings Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range depends on the Set Count and is between 0 and Set Count 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET VALue on page 263 Trigger Source Free Run IQ Capture Settings The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 322 Trigger Source External IQ Capture Se
384. rigger Holdoff remote control 322 Trigger Out Low High remote control 326 Trigger Polarity sssessssss Unit remote control sss Video BW Auto remote control ES Video BW Manual remote control 280 Video Output eere nei dp remet Weight ADJ On Off remote control Weighting Filter remote control Weight TX On Off remote control x Demod BW K7 e eg TEE X RBW remote control X Spas cene teet X Span remote control x Axis RANGE icira iesin eec ete aset tci ea c ee FL eee x Axis Range remote control 232 x Axis Ref ET 141 x Axis Ref Level remote control 232 y Axis Max Value 143 y Axis Max Value remote control 233 y Axis Min Value seeessssseseeeenerenee 143 y Unit Abs 143 y Unit Abs remote control 233 Zero Span remote control ssssssssse 283 342 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Index Softkey AUTO EE 160 165 Auto Freq 111 Auto BE 111 Auto Scale Once iier nre 104 le 110 175 BB Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 321 Blank ee X 175 Center E awn Gains 68 86 103 1
385. rnrrnnrnrnnrnranrerrnrrnnnnrnnna 231 GALCulatesm STATistics SCALeAUTO ONCE EE 232 CAL Culate nz GTATlstceGCAlexbhRaNGe ese ens ense ii ese rt ss sns nn aas 232 CAL Culate nz GTATlstceGCAlexvbRlEvel 232 CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCAlexvLOwWer esseessssesssessseee enne enne ness ense na s 233 GALEGulatesn sSTATIstics SCALEA DNIT iiir Ii eren eed eee 233 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALE Y UPPED cccccccecssccecesecessseceaceeceeeseassececeeceeeeeenaes 233 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt State gt This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF On activating this function the APD measurement is switched off Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples lt NoMeasPoints gt This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statistical measurement functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 230 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt NoMeasPoints gt 100 to 1E9 RST 100000 Example CALC STAT NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command resets the scaling of the X and Y axes in a statistical measurement
386. rs the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the slots and the y axis shows the PCDE values A measurement of the RHO factor is shown in the second part of the example RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference signal The maximum value of RHO is 1 In that case the measured signal and the reference signal are identical When measuring RHO it is required that only the pilot channel is active Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 26 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 SSS SSS SS SS SE ae aa Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors e Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors e Connect external triggering of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GATE to the signal generator trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO MS Ana
387. rst last range select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt on page 272 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP on page 272 Fast SEM Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates Fast SEM mode for all ranges in the sweep list For details see chapter 6 4 13 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements on page 188 Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on Symmet rical Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetrical Setup mode is on not all range settings can be set automatically Remote command SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 130 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis SSS SS SSS SE a Ss Softkeys and Menus for RF
388. rum Emission Mask Aborts restarts the current measurement and displays the status Start The measurement is currently running Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 138 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Stop The measurement has been stopped or in single sweep mode the end of the sweep has been reached Remote command ABORt on page 323 INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum on page 325 Restore Standard Files Spectrum Emission Mask Copies the XML files from the C R_S instr sem_backup folder to the C R_S instr sem_std folder Files of the same name are overwritten Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore on page 270 Occupied Bandwidth Activates measurement of the bandwidth assigned to the signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 245 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 205 Power Bandwidth span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Opens an edit dialog box to enter the percentage of total power in the displayed frequency range which defines the occupied bandwidth Values from 1096 to 99 996 are allowed Remote command SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth on page 292 Channel Bandwidth span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Opens an edit dialog box to enter the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel The specified channel bandwidth is used for opt
389. rument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements accus CL 77 E EE 78 L Normalize sanaaa iaaa AE Ea tele pei ent bl Er i 79 L Time Phase Estnischen 79 E te EE 79 Geer ele 79 L Enhanced AJON EE 79 L Multi Carrier Eiter 80 El WE MARNE T 80 L Roll Off Fali MNT m IE 80 L Cut Off Ereouencn nae 81 ek 4 0 0 EE 81 tieren eebe Ee a 81 BTS eA ONG oa elevates ae inte H UT 81 coco MELLE 83 Settings Overview This softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visualizes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes all of the current settings In addition you can change the current settings via this dialog box To reset all values to their default state press the Set to Default button Invert Q Off Capture Length 3 Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Set Count el Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Set To Analyze 0 Ref Level 10 0 dBm Trigger Source Free Run Channel Type Pilot Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Trigger Polarity Positive Mapping Type Dine Preamplifier Off Trigger Offset 0 0 s Mapping Auto On Select Table J Configuration Search Mode Auto Search Revision Subtype 0 1 Screen A CDP Inactive Threshold 40 0 dB Normalize Off Screen B General Result Time Phase Est Off Screen C Composite Const PN Offset 0 Screen D Channel Table Multi Carrier Off Enhanced Algorithm Off Mul
390. s the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 250 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Auto Set menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for CDA measurements For RF measurements refer to the description of the AUTO SET key in the base unit op 111 PNIS M RS 111 D e E UU 111 ugs a 112 Lese Zms kagpmmet egene 112 L Meas TIME NNI aa 112 L Upper Level Hvsteresls tnnt 112 L Lower Level Hvsteresls ttn tnter tnnt ne nnne nnns 112 Auto All Performs all automatic settings e Auto Freq on page 111 e Auto Level on page 111 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 265 Auto Freq Defines the center frequency automatically by determining the highest frequency level in the frequency span This function uses the signal counter thus it is intended for use with sinusoidal signals This function is
391. s required that only the pilot channel is active Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors e Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors e Connect external triggering of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GATE to the signal generator trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 18 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 EH Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the Peak Code Domain Error measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Peak Code Domain Error softkey and start the measurement 5 Set the center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b Inthe Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c Inthe Ref Level field enter 0 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings
392. s the EVM values Test Setup e Connect the RF output of the Signal Generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cables with N connectors e Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors e Connect external triggering of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE to the signal genera tor s trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO BTS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Composite EVM measurement 5 Set the center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b Inthe Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c Inthe Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box 6 Setan external trigger source Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 17 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 EH 3 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error a Open the IQ Capture Settings
393. s the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep Count on page 108 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 324 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 324 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 324 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 163 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis AIC a SS a es es ee Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Allowed values depend on the ratio
394. see the chapter Instrument Functions Power Sensor K9 in the base unit description This softkey is available for RF measurements Trigger Out Sets the Trigger Out port in the Additional Interfaces option R amp S FSV B5 only to low or high Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command OUTPut TRIGger on page 326 Further Information Predefined Channel Tables iiis tease eia de ne tee ku uda e dee La den Eee a kA don aaa 168 Working with Channel Tables enne 171 Channel Type Characteristics ccccccccceseccseceeesesenscncavenevencadaveeeveccececeeeeeenseeeeueeeeenas 172 Detector eius M 173 Trace Mode OVERVIEW c ENEE ENEE EES 174 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type 176 List of Available RRC and Channel Eilters enn 176 ASCGII File Export Formal erre rre pere aen nee IR qnem nier dote a a a rH NR E CHE 178 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask 179 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Fies 179 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 185 Ranges and Range Settings ciiin idiomate nee Lud dae nte a LL Edda RP ERA Ld o ada 187 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Meaeurements essen 188 Predefined CP ACLR Giandarde sse 190 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameter 191 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 167 R amp S FSV K84 K8
395. signals the power is always referenced to a transmission channel i e no value is displayed for Tx1 Ref Power Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE on page 290 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 128 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EENS Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Noise Correction Ch Power ACLR If activated the results are corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increases the dynamic range ON A reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being examined The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolution bandwidth and level setting Therefore the cor rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen Noise correc tion must be switched on again manually after the change OFF No noise correction is performed AUTO Noise correction is performed After a parameter change noise correc tion is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement is performed Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 292 Adjust Ref Lvl Ch Power ACLR Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adju
396. site EVNM cent cee ee eee e teeta taeda aaaeaaaaeaaneaecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 307 Composite Data EVM MS Mode 307 Composite Data Constellation MS Mode 307 Composite Data Bitstream MS Mode 307 Channel Table Trace BTS mode 308 Channel Table Trace MS mode eene 309 Channel Table CTABle BTS Mode 310 Channel Table CTABle MS Mode 311 Channel DBitstream nennen enne nre 311 Peak Code Domain Error 312 Code Domain Error BTS Mode nennen nnns 312 Code Domain Error MS Mode 312 SYMbOl Constela OM M 313 EVM VS ue EEN 313 Composite Consiellatton cece cee eeeaaeaaaeaaecaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 314 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual eene 314 INPut commande 314 TRIGger Commande 320 Other Referenced Commande 323 Programming Examples esses eene ennemi n nnns 327 Retrieving Trace Results 327 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 195 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis Notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the indi vidual description of the commands Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command
397. so determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 294 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 165 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 3 7 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Sweep Points Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep e Entry via rotary knob Inthe range from 101 to 1001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 100 points Inthe range from 1001 to 32001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 1000 points e Entry via keypad All values in the defined range can be set The default value is 691 sweep points This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 298 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for RF measurements For CDA measurements see chapter 6 2 9 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements on page 112 Diets UB e EA 166 Noise SOUE cede otii n genet ere enccexet ede vas desu ee cedes cot eeexta coa nadie bas exa donne d eade uud 166 NHS He de 166 PONSI SENS O ai cate
398. splay range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 250 Range Linear Range Selects linear scaling for the level axis in The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default setting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Range Lin Unit Range Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 153 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deeg Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 253 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 319 RF Atten Manua
399. ss 119 Continue Single Sweep remote control 324 325 Continuous Sweep remote control 325 Cont Meas remote Control 325 Coupling Ratio 2 n ntn mre 160 CP ACP MC ACLR remote control 205 207 CP ACLR Config eeseseeeeeee 121 Decim Sep e Default Coupling 2 rentrer 162 Default Settings sssssssseseeenees Default Settings remote control Delete K84 i iret ret eer 77 97 Delete Channel K84 ssessssssss 76 96 Delete Range Delete Range remote control 271 Deviation Lin Log remote control 253 Display Config K84 2 81 Display Config K85 101 Edit ACLR Limit remote control 218 219 220 221 222 Edit Power Classes eeeeeeeeeeeeeereeerrerrerrrreneen 137 Edit Reference Range ssssssss 134 136 Edit Reference Range remote control 268 269 278 El Atten Mode Auto Man 106 155 Fast ACLR On Off 128 Fast ACLR On Off remote control 292 Filter Type nre eer eth sk 162 Filter Type remote control 280 Frequency Offset AAA 149 Full Span remote control s es esseere 283 Gate Delay remote control 295 Gated Trigger On Off sssssssssssssss 144 Gated Trigger remote control
400. ssseceeceeceseeeeees 226 CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class LIMit S TATe sss 226 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks EG bechum PClLass Cass MANimum 227 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechum PClLass Cassz MiNimum 227 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechumbRtGtore senes enne ss nsns nn s 227 GALGCulatesmsLIMitek ESPectrum VALue 1 ete nec t nnn td Ix dens saandecdexsadaneadant s 228 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIMits Limits This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Limits gt 1 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 separated by commas 200 lt 0 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 in ascending order separated by commas gt 200 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 224 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis Example CALCulate Subsystem CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following power classes lt 200 50 lt 50 50 gt lt 50 70 gt 70 200 Query CALC LIM ESP LIM Response 200 50 50 70 200 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum MODE Mode This command activates or deactivates the automatic selection of the limit line in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix n lt k gt Parameters lt Mode gt Example 1 4 window irrelevant AUTO MANUAL AUTO The limit line depends on the m
401. sted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio For details on manual settings see Settings of CP ACLR test parameters in the descrip tion of the base unit The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an opti mum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still significantly below the reference level Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 289 Spectrum Emission Mask Performs a comparison of the signal power in different carrier offset ranges with the maximum values specified in the 1xEV DO specification Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 245 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 223 Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a submenu to edit the sweep list and displays the Sweep List dialog box Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 129 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis SS SS SS SE a es es ee ee Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask After a preset the sweep list contains a set of de
402. surement evaluates a single channel type over a single slot Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 59 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Measurements and Result Displays Bitstream Table IQ 1 Clrw eee Ss Se Fig 6 26 Channel Bitstream result display Select a specific symbol using the MKR key If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of displaying use the marker to scroll inside the list Depending on the modulation and the channel type a slot may contain a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 400 bits For more information on this topic refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 171 Depending on the modulation type a symbol consists of the following bits e BPSK 1 bit only the or the Q component is assigned in case of complex mapping a 2BPSK modulation is displayed with both the and Q components e QPSK 2 bits I component followed by the Q component e 8PSK 3 bits e 16QAM 4 bits e 64QAM 5 bits Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP BSTReam see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 16 Channel Bitstream on page 311 6 1 4 14 Peak Code Domain Error The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maxim
403. surement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 74 field Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 17 Peak Code Domain Error on page 312 6 1 3 10 Code Domain Error This result display shows the difference in power of the test signal and an ideally gener ated reference signal In the diagram the codes are plotted on the x axis The number of codes corresponds to the base spreading factor which depends on the channel type Refer to for an overview of the spreading factors for each channel type The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the error power of each channel Since it is an error power active and inactive channels can be rated jointly at a glance The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 44 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 1 3 11 Measurements and Result Displays Code Domain Error Power IQ 1 Clrw Start Code 0 2 Code Stop Code 31 Fig 6 10 Code Domain Error result display The power values of the active and inactive codes are displayed in different colors e Yellow active code e Cyan inactive code Remote control
404. surements to 16 AVER STAT ON Switches on the calculation of average INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps SENSe JAVERage lt n gt STATe lt Trace gt State This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 299 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis STATus subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt Trace gt 1 6 Selects the trace Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example AVER OFF Switches off the average calculation for trace 1 AVER STAT3 ON Switches on the average calculation for trace 3 7 7 STATus subsystem STATus QUEStonable S YNC CON Ter EE 300 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVEMNG recreo tre RE tentia nnn nne 300 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis Return values Result Ifthe resultis ON an error occurred Details can be obtained using STAT QUES SYNC EVEN RST OFF Example STAT QUES SYNC COND Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CDMA EVDO STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis The value can only be read once For details on the possible errors see chap ter 8 Status Reporting System of the 1xEV DO Analysis on pag
405. t Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 103 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 2 4 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 283 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for CDA and Power vs time measurements For all other RF meas urements see chapter 6 3 4 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for RF Measurements on page 151 PROM LGV E 104 UES lee E ee 104 L Auto Scale EE 104 L Y Axis MaxiTbm iniieti ta tetti ttt dtr te n ted 105 EE S iL EG 105 Ref Level ET 105 Preamp OinjOTh PRODERIT 105 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 105 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto 106 St 4 isl gfe p m ee EE 106 El Atten Mode Auta Mall 3 RE EH em eld 106 LE PACH ar M E 107 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is ind
406. t area 0 1 lt RHO1 gt RHOoverall 1 over all slots over all chips with start of averaging 0 1 at the half slot limit lt RHO2 gt RHOoverall 2 over all slots over all chips with start of averaging 0 1 at the quarter slot limit lt PPILot gt Absolute power in the PILOT channel type dBm lt PMAC gt Absolute power in the MAC channel type dBm lt PDATa gt Absolute power in the DATA channel type dBm lt PPReamble gt Absolute power in the PREAMBLE channel type dBm lt MACCuracy gt Composit EVM lt DMTYpe gt Modulation type in the DATA channel type 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 10 64 QAM lt MACTive gt Number of active MAC channels lt DACTive gt Number of active DATA channels lt PLENGth gt Length of preamble in chips lt RHO gt RHO value for the selected channel type slot lt PCDerror gt Peak Code Domain error dB lt IQIMbalance gt IQ imbalance lt IQOFfset gt IQ offset lt SRATe gt Symbol rate ksps lt CHANnel gt Channel number lt SFACtor gt Spreading factor of the channel Se Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 304 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit lt TOFFset gt If the evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active see S SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 264 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive ch
407. t can be selected and the measurement sequence can be finished Also refer to the description of the Reference Mean Pwr and Reference Manual softkeys Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 209 Restart on Fail Power vs Time Evaluates the limit line over all results at the end of a single sweep The sweep restarts if the result is FAIL On a PASS or MARGIN result the sweep ends This softkey is only available in single sweep mode Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart on page 245 Restore STD Lines Power vs Time Restores the limit lines defined in the standard to the state they were in when the device was supplied In this way unintended overwriting of the standard lines can be undone Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k PVTime RESTore on page 209 List Evaluation Power vs Time Opens a table below the measurement screen that shows the averaged maximum and minimum values for the current measurement Adjust Ref Lvl Power vs Time Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio For details on manual settings see Settings of CP ACLR test parameters in the descrip tion of the base unit Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 146
408. t refer to the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 129 softkey in the Measurement menu Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 63 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Measurements and Result Displays 6 1 5 4 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth in which the signal power can be found By default the bandwidth is displayed in which 99 of the signal is found The percentage of the signal power included in the measurement can be modified In the top right corner of the screen the bandwidth and frequency markers are displayed The default settings of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement are listed in the table below Setting Default value Occupied Bandwidth ON Frequency Span 4 2 MHz Sweep Time 100 ms RBW 30 kHz VBW 300 kHz Detector RMS For details on the softkeys of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement see Occupied Bandwidth on page 139 in the Measurement menu 6 1 5 5 Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF The CCDF measurement displays the CCDF and the Crest factor The CCDF shows distribution of the signal amplitudes For the measurement a signal section of settable length is recorded continuously in a zero span The measurement is useful to determine errors of linear amplifiers The Crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak power and the mean power Beneath the measurement screen a table containin
409. t value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the upper lt UpperLimit gt alternate adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 221 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power Note that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adja
410. ta sais Ee ee 167 Eeer M RR 167 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 315 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 323 Video Output Sends a video output signal according to the measured level to the connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV Note Video output does not return valid values in IQ or FFT mode Remote command OUTP IF VID SeeOUTPut IF SOURce on page 326 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 166 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis El 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 6 6 4 7 6 4 8 6 4 9 6 4 10 6 4 11 6 4 12 6 4 13 6 4 14 6 4 15 Further Information Power Sensor For precise power measurement a power sensor can be connected to the instrument via the front panel USB connector or the rear panel power sensor option R amp S FSV B5 The Power Sensor Support firmware option R amp S FSV K9 provides the power mea surement functions for this test setup This softkey is only available if the R amp S FSV option Power Sensor R amp S FSV K9 is installed For details
411. te CDPRelative CERRor CHANnel CODMulation CODPower DACtive DMTYPe DRPich EVMPeak EVMRms FERRor FERPpm IQIMbalance IQOFfset MACCuracy MACTive MTYPe PCDerror PDATa PLENGth PMAC POFFset PPICh PPILot PPReamble PRRI PTOTal RHO RHOData RHOMac RHOVerall RHOPilot RHO1 RHO2 SFACtor SLOT SRATe TFRame TOFFset ACTive Number of active channels CDEPeak Peak value of EVM error vector magnitude of composite data channel MS mode only CDERms RMS value of EVM error vector magnitude of composite data channel MS mode only CDPabsolute channel power absolute in dBm CDPRelative channel power relative in dB CERRor chip rate error in ppm CHANnel channel number CODMulation modulation type of the composite data channel MS mode only CODPower power of the composite data channel MS mode only DACtive number of active DATA channels DMTYPe modulation type of the DATA channel type 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16QAM DRPich Delta RRI PICH in dB EVMPeak error vector magnitude peak in EVMRms error vector magnitude rms in FERRor frequency error in Hz FERPpm frequency error in ppm IQIMbalance Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 202 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 CALCulate Subsystem IO imbalance in 96 IQOFfset IO offset in 96 MACCuracy composite EVM in 96 MACTive number
412. te command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 282 Frequency Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 283 Ref Level Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 252 Ref Level Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 252 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 86 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Preamp On Off Frontend Settings Switches the prea
413. ter 4 Software Update Installing Options Chapter 5 Documents Online Help The online help contains context specific help on operating the R amp S FSV and all available options It describes both manual and remote operation The online help is installed on Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 6 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Preface ee ee ee 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation the R amp S FSV by default and is also available as an executable chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The current release notes are provided in the Internet Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Li
414. tering the correct PN offset If the search range for the start of the power control group and the PN offset are known then fewer possibilities have to be tested This increases the measurement speed Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference input of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors e Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIGGER GATE IN to the external trigger output of the signal generator Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMU Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV ODO Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO MS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey b In the Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz C In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box
415. tetm reet te erede tx pne Pda aceto nba Exe e abad 199 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Gubsvetem 201 CALCulate LIMit PVTime Gubevsiem eene 208 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 210 CALCulate DELTamarker subesvstem emen 210 CAL Culate LIMIt subsystem perite EENS seen tabe eene eds 218 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem essen enn 224 CAL Cullate PSE sSubsystet ine eed eres ERR RE ERRARE YE nene Ee uua da 228 CALCulate STATistics subsvetem eene 230 Other Referenced CALCulate Commande 234 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 198 CALCulate Subsystem 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem The CALCulate FEED subsystem selects the type of evaluation for the measurement data This corresponds to the result display selection in manual operation erer D E S 199 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt ResultDisplay gt This command selects the result display for the measured data For details on result displays see chapter 6 1 Measurements and Result Displays on page 32 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt ResultDisplay gt XPOW CDP XPOW CDP ABS XPOW CDP RAT XPOW CDEP XTIM CDP ERR CTABle XTIM CDP PVChip XTIM CDP ERR SUMM XTIM CDP MACCuracy XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain XTIM CDP SYMB CONSt XTIM CDP SYMB EVM XTIM CDP BSTReam XTIM CDP COMP CON
416. the base system is given in the base unit description In this section only the new and altered status registers for the 1xEV DO Analysis options K84 and K85 are described The R amp S FSV K84 K85 use the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Although this register is provided by the base system the 1xEV DO Analysis options use different bits and definitions The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register contains information on the error situation in the code domain analysis of the 1xEV DO Analysis options The bits can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 300 Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is not used Frame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application Possible reasons Incorrectly set frequency Incorrectly set level Incorrectly set PN Offset Incorrectly set values for Swap IQ Invalid signal at input 2to3 These bits are not used K84 Preamble Current Slot missing This bit is set when the Preamble channel type is being investigated within the application and there is no preamble in the current slot The measurement results that can be read out for the Preamble channel type are not valid 6 to 14 K84 Preamble Overall missing This bit is set when the Preamble channel type is being investigated within the application and there is no preamble in at least one of the slots being
417. the pilot channel is identical over all half slots Therefore it can be used as a constant reference for the result display In contrast the total power can vary from half slot to half slot due to the possibility of a power level change in the different code channels In the Power vs half slot result display with enabled power control and reference to the total power of the signal the power control of the selected channel is not necessarily reflected Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 100 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Example There is just one data channel in the signal and its power is controlled The power is referred to the total power of the signal which consists only of the contri bution from this one data channel In the Power vs Half Slot diagram a straight line is displayed instead of the expected power staircase For relative result displays the reference value Total Power is therefore only meaningful if the signal does not contain power control For signals with enabled power control use the Pilot Channel setting since the pilot channel is not subject to power control under any circumstances Remote command SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 261 Display Config This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display In the Code Domain Analyzer the results are displayed in up to fo
418. the recorded slots In subtype 2 the following modulation types are added within some of the MAC channels ON OFF keying ACK on the branch OOKA 1 ON OFF keying ACK on the Q branch OOKA Q ON OFF keying NACK on the I branch OOKN I and the ON OFF keying NACK on the Q branch OOKN Q Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 78 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements If the 2 bits within an ON OFF keying modulation are identical the modulation cannot be recognized as an ON OFF keying modulation If both bits contain 1 ON the modulation is identical to a BPSK and is recognized as BPSK If both bits contain 0 OFF there is no power within that code and slot and therefore no modulation is detected If the eval uation is set to MAPPING COMPLEX the separate and Q branch detection within the result summary is no longer selected and the modulation type is a 2BPSK with the coding number 5 via remote In subtype 3 in R amp S FSV K84 the modulation type 64QAM can be detected The MAC RA channel occupies a variable code number and the preamble occupies the l and the Q branch Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 247 Normalize Result Settings Select this parameter to eliminate the DC offset from the signal By default the parameter is deselected Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 260 T
419. ti Carrier Filter Off Filter Type LowPass TE Roll Off Factor 0 02 Gelee Cut Off Frequency 1 25 MHz CDP Average Off Code Power Relative Close To change the settings either use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to change the focus to any other block or press one of the following buttons e Frontend Settings on page 68 e IQ Capture Settings on page 69 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 67 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EEN Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Select on page 83 Channel Table Settings on page 73 Result Settings on page 77 Display Config on page 81 When using the rotary knob or the cursor keys press the ENTER key to open the corre sponding dialog box The Settings Overview dialog box always remains open while settings are modified Frontend Settings This softkey opens the Frontend Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Frequency Settings Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Level Settings Ref Level 10 0 dBm Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Preamplifier On Off Adjust Ref Level Center Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN min 2 E fcenter E fmax SPAN min 2 span 0 0 Hz lt freue S fmax fmax and SpanNmin are s
420. tically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing within a specific frequency range channel band width The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later For details on the settings of span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector and trace averaging see chapter 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parame ters on page 191 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 289 CCDF Starts the measurement of the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function and the Crest factor Also opens the CCDF submenu containing the following softkeys Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 245 Res BW CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to set the resolution bandwidth directly For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has to be wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the actual peaks of the signal amplitude correctly In order not to influence the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is automat ically set to 10 MHz The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 278 of Samples CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of power measurements that are taken into account for the statistics Apart from the number of measurements the
421. tio of the mean error power to the power of an ideally generated reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used The EVM is shown in The diagram consists of an EVM for each chip n A Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 55 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Measurements and Result Displays Composite Data EVM el Clrw Start Chip 0 256 Chips Stop Chip 1023 Fig 6 20 Composite Data EVM result display This measurement result is only available for subtypes 2 or higher The results are dis played for the special composite data channel regardless of which channel is selected Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CEVM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chapter 7 9 9 Composite Data EVM MS Mode on page 307 6 1 4 8 Composite Data Constellation This result display shows the channel constellation of the modulated composite data signal at symbol level Composite Data Constellation ei Clirw Fig 6 21 Composite Data Constellation result display This measurement result is only available for subtypes 2 or higher The results are dis played for the special composite data channel regardless of which channel is se
422. tion Type FSV Instrument model Version 1 50 Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2010 Date of data set storage Screen A Instrument mode Points per Symbol 4 x Axis Start 13 sym Points per symbol Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 Y axis reference position Trace 1 Trace number Meas Result Result type Meas Signal Magnitude Result display Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 178 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 4 9 6 4 10 Further Information Description File contents header and data section x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 592 Number of results List of results values ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup For a detailed description refer to chapter 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format on page 178 File contents RefType CPOWER TxBandwidth 9540000 Hz Filter State ON Alpha 0 22 Description reference range setup for details see Edit Ref erence
423. tion Mode Traffic CDP Average Off Code Power Relative Power Reference Total Pwr close To change the settings either use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to change the focus to any other block or press one of the following buttons e Frontend Settings on page 68 IQ Capture Settings on page 69 Synch Multicarrier Settings on page 89 Channel Table Settings on page 73 Result Demod Settings on page 97 Display Config on page 101 When using the rotary knob or the cursor keys press the ENTER key to open the corre sponding dialog box The Settings Overview dialog box always remains open while settings are modified Frontend Settings This softkey opens the Frontend Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 85 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Frequency Settings Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Level Settings Ref Level 10 0 dBm Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Preamplifier On e Off Adjust Ref Level Center Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN min 2 ES fcenter E fmax E Spanmin 2 span 0 0 HZ lt foenter S fmax fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remo
424. tion between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chap ter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 176 Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DNARROW key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down wards The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the RBW display in the channel bar This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emis sion Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF It is also available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 279 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 278 Res BW Auto Couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span for span gt 0 If you change the span the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if you need the ideal resolution bandwidth in relation to a particular span This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Occupied Band width and the CCDF It is also available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 279 Video BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandw
425. tive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode This softkey is available for code domain measurements Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 322 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 295 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well
426. tkey b In the Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 22 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 mam U ee CN CLAN UN 4 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed screen A shows the power of the code domain of the signal The x axis represents the individual channels or codes while the y axis shows the power of each channel In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference frequency gt Press the SETUP key a Press the Reference Int Ext softkey to switch to an external reference Screen A again shows the Code Domain Power measurement and screen B the result summary After the synchronization of the reference frequencies of the devices the fre quency error should now be smaller than 10 Hz Behavior with deviating center frequency setting A measurement can only be valid if the center frequency of the DUT and the analyzer are balanced gt Onthe signal generator chan
427. trument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Information Spectrum Emission Mask Standard W CDMA 3GPP 39 43 dBm DL Tx Power 47 93 dBm Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 30 000 kHz Fig 6 29 Example Spectrum emission mask standard file PowerClass_39_43 xml Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the R amp S FSV is not able to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen Therefore we recommend you make a copy of an existing file see Save As Standard softkey and edit the copy of the file Alternatively edit the settings using the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey and the Sweep List dialog box and save the XML file with the Save As Standard softkey after wards This way no modifications have to be done in the XML file itself Basically the file consists of three elements that can be defined e The BaseFormat element e The PowerClass element e The Range element The BaseFormat element It carries information about basic settings In this element only the ReferencePower child node has any effects on the measurement itself The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask Standard on the measurement screen The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 6 12 In the example above PowerClass 39 43 xml under C r_s instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP see figure 6 29 these attributes are defined as follows
428. ts in a table Channel Result Various measurement results for a specific channel Power vs Chip Power of the selected channel versus all chips Power vs Symbol Power of the selected channel and of the selected slot versus all symbols Composite EVM RMS Averaged error between the test signal and the ideal reference signal Channel Table Channel occupancy table Symbol Constellation EVM vs Symbol Channel constellation of the modulated signal at symbol level Error Vector Magnitude result display Composite Constellation Composite Constellation result display Channel Bitstream Display of demodulated bits Peak Code Domain Error Code Domain Error Power Projection of the maximum error between the test signal and the reference signal Code Domain Error Power result display For details on the displayed results and default settings refer to chapter 6 1 Measure ments and Result Displays on page 32 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 82 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements You can configure the result displays via the Result Settings on page 77 dialog box Select Opens a dialog box to select a specific channel and or slot for evaluation Enter the channel number and slot number to be evaluated as a decimal in the respective field The number of available channels depends o
429. ttenuator exhibiting suitable attenuation The following values for external attenuation are recommended to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the unit is not reduced too much Maximum Power Recommended external attenuation 2 55 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 2 50 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 2 45 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 2 40 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 2 35 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 2 30 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 2 25 to 30 dBm 0 to 10 dB 2 20 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB lt 20 dBm 0 dB Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 29 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Test Setup for Base Station and Mobile Station Tests For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input of the analyzer The R amp S FSV must be operated with an external frequency reference to ensure that the error limits of the 1xEV DO specification for frequency measurements on base stations mobile stations are met A rubidium frequency standard can be used as a reference source for example If the base station or mobile station has a trigger output connect the trigger output of the base station mobile station to the rear trigger input of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE Presettings ph zm Qi m P Jo Enter the external attenuation Enter the reference level Enter the center frequency Set the trigger If used enable the external refere
430. ttings Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 70 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EENS Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 322 Trigger Polarity IQ Capture Settings Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode This softkey is available for code domain measurements Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 322 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 295 Trigger Offset IQ Capture Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and
431. u change the span The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 Spanmin S f span S f max fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 283 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either down wards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected band width and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 150 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 3 4 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF or Power vs Time measurements Remote command SWE TIME
432. ulate n MARKer m TRAQCe esses enne nre eneren rne treeneret reset eniin eren HANNE aiara 234 CAlCulate nz DEA aearchlbpGEarch AUTO 229 CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin esee rennen erre nree neret 229 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHoOw sse eene eene en nenrn nennt nsn n eren nnn nnns seni 229 CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges sse reen rennes 230 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate eese eene 228 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe CALCulatecnzGTATlsticehNGAMoles A CALCulate lt n gt STATisticS PRESEL cccsssssccssssesssccnssccsssseessensssconssedsscanssoesnsscnsseeasetsnescssssessasenesecseanens CAlCulate cnzGTATlsticebRE Gute Trace 231 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE sese rennen nrenn restes rennen rns snnneis 232 CAlCulatecnzGTATlstceGCAlehRAGe rennen etre dnnreen eren tns n nns sere rennen neis CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer esesseesseeseeeeeenene nennen nene rennen tenens iens eterne CAlCulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAleyvUN neret n eren nnreet niens sent senes CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALE Y Uber CALCulate n THReshold onore tren enit eaa reete tei th ha EE ae ER Ey ee ER eR ERR ERES RA Rae ie Reus RE e ET CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass 236 CONFioure CDPowert BTGICT
433. ulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe lt State gt This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and off The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 212 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis CALCulate Subsystem The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker A fixed reference point can be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X and CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y commands independent of the position of marker 1 and of a trace Suffix n Selects the measurement window m irrelevant Note marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise mea surement results Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON
434. um value for the Code Domain Error for all codes That means that in this result display the Code Domain Error is pro jected onto the code domain at a specific base spreading factor The spreading factor is automatically set by the channel type Set the number of slots via the Capture Length on page 70 field In the diagram each bar of the x axis represents one PCG The y axis represents the error power The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The currently selected half slot is marked in red Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 60 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Measurements and Result Displays Peak Code Domain Error IQ 1 Clrw Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 2 Fig 6 27 Peak Code Domain Error result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is very large The result dis play therefore shows a peak code domain error that is too high for all half slots Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 74 field Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selecte
435. um value of the y axis for the selected result display Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 254 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 5 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 6 2 1 INSTrument Subsystem Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Mode CDMA EVDO INSTrument Subsystem The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text param eters or fixed numbers INST rumen SE beet i Recette ee oe Beg eee 255 INSTr mentNSELGQL eiie Lec Re aede a a aaa Aa ia ia a a iaaa iaaa 255 INSTrument SELect lt InstrName gt Parameters lt InstrName gt Selects the operating mode BDO 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option R amp S FSV K84 MDO 1xEV DO MS Analysis option R amp S FSV K85 INSTrument NSELect lt InstrNo gt Parameters lt InstrNo gt Selects the operating mode 14 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option R amp S FSV K84 15 1xEV DO MS Analysis option R amp S FSV K85 SENSe Subsystem The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer In accordance with the SCPI standard the keyword SENS
436. ur screens Any result can be dis played in either screen Display Configuration Screen A wi Screen A active Result Diagram for Screen A Code Domain Power Symbol Constellation Result Summary EVM vs Symbol Power vs Half Slot Composite Constellation Power vs Symbol Channel Bitstream Composite EVM RMS Peak Code Domain Error Channel Table Code Domain Error Power Composite Data EVM p Composite Data Constellation E Composite Data Bitstream This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display configura tion The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result display configurations for meas urements in the code domain TEE Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 101 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deeg Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Result Display Configuration Definition Code Domain Power Code Domain Power result display Result Summary Various measurement results in a table Power vs Half Slot Power of the selected channel versus all half slots Power vs Symbol Power of the selected channel and of the selected slot versus all symbols Composite EVM RMS Averaged error between the test signal and the ideal reference signal Channel Table Channel occupancy table Composite Data EVM Composite Data Constellation EVM display for special composite data channel only av
437. uring the Composite EVM a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey b Inthe Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c Inthe Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the code domain power of the signal Compared to the measurement without an external trigger See previous example the repetition rate of the measurement increases In screen B the result summary is displayed In the row Trigger to Frame the offset between the trigger event and and the start of the slot is shown Adjusting the Trigger Offset The delay between the trigger event and the start of the slot can be compensated for by adjusting the trigger offset e Set an external trigger source and the trigger offset Open the IQ Capture dialog box Set the Trigger Source option to External Set the Trigger Offset to 100us to compensate analog delays of the trigger event In the two screens the following results are displayed Screen A shows the the same as above In screen B the result summary is displayed In the Trigger to Frame result the offset between the trigger event and the start of the slot has been adjusted Behaviour With the Wrong PN Offset The last adjustment is setting the PN Pseudo Noise offset correctly The measurement can only be valid if the PN offset on the analyzer is the s
438. us 1us 1us Range 3 Stop 1 us 1us 1us 1 us 1 us 1us Range 3 Use of Off off off off off Remote command SWE EGAT ON see SENSe SWEep EGATe on page 294 Switches on the external gate mode SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM SlotA see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k COMMent on page 296 Adds a comment to trace 1 SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe range on page 296 Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1 SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt on page 296 Sets the starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms SWE EGAT TRAC1 STopl 5ms see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt on page 297 Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms SWE EGAT TRACI PER 5ms see SENSe SWRep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERiod on page 296 Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 144 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis SS SS SS a es a ee Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Adjust Settings CCDF Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum p
439. us for RF Measurements x RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage 96 of the resolution bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 96 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 282 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 282 zCenter CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Marker CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Manual CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 282 Start Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency The following range of values is allowed fmin s fstart fmax
440. usted separately using the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey see Adjust Ref Lvl on page 119 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 193 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis ri 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 3 7 3 1 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 7 7 8 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis This chapter describes the remote commands specific to the 1xEV DO Analysis options R amp S FSV K84 K85 The abbreviation EVDO stands for the operating mode of this option For details on conventions used in this chapter refer to chapter 7 1 Notation on page 195 For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands refer to the correspond ing subsystem in the base unit description In particular the following subsystems are identical to the base unit refer to the base unit description e CALCulate DELTamarker e CALCulate MARKer except for the specific commands described in chapter 7 2 CALCulate Subsystem on page 198 e DISPlay subsystem e FORMat subsystem e INITiate subsystem e INPut subsystem e MMEM subsystem e OUTput subsystem e SENSe subsystem except for the specific commands described in chapter 7 6 SENSe Subsystem on page 255 e TRIGger subsystem Notatton 2 195 CALCulate SUDSYSte ime eu ccccvescctees cesestereeevescedeceeescederecesssceeeecevneedereeeeneetteeeeeecees 198 CALCulat e FEED SUBSYSTEM eccn
441. value at this measurement point Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 173 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Further Information All detectors work in parallel in the background which means that the measurement speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces Number of measured values During a frequency sweep the R amp S FSV increments the first local oscillator in steps that are smaller than approximately 1 10 of the bandwidth This ensures that the oscillator step speed is conform to the hardware settling times and does not affect the precision of the measured power The number of measured values taken during a sweep is independent of the number of oscillator steps It is always selected as a multiple or a fraction of 691 default number of trace points displayed on the screen Choosing less then 691 measured values e g 125 or 251 will lead to an interpolated measurement curve choosing more than 691 points e g 1001 2001 will result in several measured values being overlaid at the same frequency position RMS detector and VBW If the RMS detector is selected the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to ac
442. vated For further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 187 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 278 SENSe ESPectrum BWID on page 268 ENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe on page 268 ENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa on page 269 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 136 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to modify the power class settings Power Classes EI x Used Power Classes All Y Power Glass PMin lt P lt PMax Power Class 1 INF Lens dBm Sweep List Power Class 2 Lens dBm 40 0 dBm Sweep List Power Class 3 40 0 dBm BT Sweep List Remove Used Power Classes Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Choose the power classes to be used from this dropdown menu It is only possible to select either one of the defined power classes or all of the defined power classes together Only power classes for which limits are defined are available for selection If All is selected the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power in the reference range is used The limits assigned to that power class are applied see PMin PMax on page 137 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive on page 225 To define all limits in one ste
443. ve limit The limit check fails when one of the limits is violated RST REL Example ESP RANG3 LIM STAT AND Sets for all ranges the combined absolute relative limit check SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel Value This command sets the reference level for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Value gt Refer to the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example ESP RANG2 RLEV 0 Sets the reference level of range 2 to 0 dBm SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME lt SweepTime gt This command sets the sweep time for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 269 Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 276 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt SweepTime gt Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet RST 0 27 s Example ESP RANG1 SWE TIME 1 Sets the sweep time for range 1 to 1 s SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO State This command activates or deactivates the automatic sweep time setting for the specified
444. vs PCG Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 261 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis REESEN SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Power gt PICH TOTal PICH The reference power is the power of the pilot channel TOTal The reference power is the total power of the signal referred per PCG to the corresponding PCG RST PICH For further information refer to Power Reference on page 100 Example CDP PREF TOT Sets total power as reference power Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower QINVert lt State gt This command inverts the Q component of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q component Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA SENSe CDPower SBANd lt Sideband gt This command is used to swap the left and right sideband Parameters lt Sideband gt NORMal INVers RST NORMal Example CDP SBAN INV Swap sidebands Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower SET COUNt lt NumberSets gt This command sets the number of sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s memory Refer to Set Count on page 70 for more information Parameters lt NumberSets gt Range 1 to 490 RST 1 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Sets the number of sets to be captured to 10 Mode CDMA EVDO Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 262 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower SET VALue lt Set gt This comman
445. weep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 294 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Trigger menu in 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode for CDA measurments For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Trigger Source Free Run The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 322 Trigger Source External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 322 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 108 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deg 6 2 7 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The sweep starts after a posi
446. wer is displayed in dBm If activated the channel power density is displayed instead Thus the absolute unit of the channel power is switched from dBm to dBm Hz The channel power density in dBm Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows channel power density channel power log 9 channel bandwidth By means of this function it is possible e g to measure the signal noise power density or use the additional functions ACLR Abs Rel on page 127 and ACLR Reference on page 123 to obtain the signal to noise ratio Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ on page 206 Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to select the power mode Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 126 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis DEE Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Clear Write Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If this mode is activated the channel power and the adjacent channel powers are calcu lated directly from the current trace default mode Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE WRIT see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 205 Max Hold Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If this mode is activated the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm
447. when selecting high lighting the Channel Type field that should be changed modulation settings are changed in the same way To change the channel number type another channel number in the form ChannelNum ber SpreadingFactor or just the code number in the respective field Confirm the change with the ENTER key To activate or deactivate a channel select the State field and confirm with the ENTER key The R amp S FSV automatically checks for conflicts between two active channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 239 Delete Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel without further notice Meas New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Initiates a measurement in Auto Search mode see Channel Search Mode on page 73 The measurement results are applied to the active channel table The active channel table is overwritten without further notice The softkey is only available if you have selected the Auto Search mode in the Channel Table Settings dialog box Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 96 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Deeg Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Sort New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Sorts the table according to the following rules First off active channels are separated from inactive channels Within these categories sorting is then done first by the channel type
448. x modulation types of the DATA channel type Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDP OrCALC FEED XPOW CDP RAT seechapter 7 2 1 CAL Culate FEED Subsystem on page 199 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chapter 7 9 2 Code Domain Power MS mode on page 303 Result Summary The Result Summary show the data of various measurements in numerical form for all channels dB 0 01946 Fig 6 15 Result Summary The Result Summary is divided in three parts Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 49 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Measurements and Result Displays General results for the selected set Slot results for the selected half slot Channel results for the selected channel General Results for all channels The General Results in the upper part of the table show results for all channels and over all half slots of a specific set Carrier Frequency Error absolute and relative Shows the frequency error referred to the center frequency of the R amp S FSV The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSV and that of the device under test Differences of more than 4 0 kHz between transmitter and receiver frequency impair the synchronization of the Code Domain Power measurement If at all possible the transmitter and the receiver sh
449. y the factor 100 40 2 5 ALT2 150 kHz ALT3 200 kHz ALT4 250 kHz SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel lt Spacing gt This command defines the channel spacing for the carrier signals Suffix channel 1 11 the TX channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 14 kHz to 20 GHz RST 20 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC CHAN 25kHz Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 291 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis a Se a a a Kio SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt Number This command selects the number of carrier signals The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 207 Parameters lt Number gt 1 to 18 RST 1 Example POW ACH TXCH COUN 3 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth Percentage This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power This value is the basis for the occupied bandwidth measurement see SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 289 Parameters Percentage 10 to 99 9PCT RST 99PCT Example POW BWID 95PCT SENSe POWer HSPeed State This command switches on or off the high speed channel adjacent channel power mea surement The measurement itself is performed in zero span on the center frequencies of the individual channels The command automatically switches to
450. yout and the same corresponding submenu The New softkey opens the New Channel Table dialog box In this dialog you can build a new channel table All fields are empty The Copy softkey copies all elements of the selected channel table and opens the Copy Channel Table dialog box The name of the new channel table is set to Copy of Sour ceChannelTableName gt The Edit softkey opens the Edit Channel Table dialog box and the corresponding menu In this dialog box you can edit an existing channel table Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 74 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Note that changes are never saved automatically Save your channel tables before end ing the application See Save softkey for details The dialog box contains the following items You can modify the white fields as you like The grey fields can not be modified these are automatically calculated by the R amp S FSV Channel Table Settings Name DO16QAM i Description 1xEV DO standard table Modulation Domain Conflict PF Save Cancel Table 6 1 Channel table settings Item Description Name Enter the name of the selected channel table which will be saved under lt name gt xml The name is case sensitive and may not contain spaces It must be a valid MS Windows file name Note that the old channe
451. zero span and back Depending on the selected mobile radio standard weighting filters with characteristic or very steep sided channel filters are used for band limitation Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW HSP ON SENSe POWer NCORrection Mode This command turns noise cancellation on and off If noise cancellation is on the R amp S FSV performs a reference measurement to determine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement result first active trace only Operating Manual 1173 0766 02 08 292 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 7 6 2 6 SENSe Subsystem The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A corresponding message is displayed on the screen Noise correction must be turned on again manually after the change Parameters lt Mode gt ON Performs noise correction OFF Performs no noise correction AUTO Performs noise correction After a parameter change noise correction is restarted automati cally and a new correction measurement is performed RST OFF Example POW NCOR ON SENSe POWer TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command assigns the channel adjacent channel power measurement to the indi cated trace The corresponding trace must be active i e

R&S FSV-K84/-K85 Firmware Option 1xEV

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSV-K84/-K85 Firmware Option 1xEV

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSV-K84/-K85 Firmware Option 1xEV